Metro1000 Hardware Description (V300R007C01 - 01)

OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP
Optical Transmission System

V300R007C01
Hardware Description
Issue 01
Date 2010-03-25
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2010-03-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX 155/622H V300R007C01
OptiX iManager U2000 V100R002C00

Intended Audience
This document describes the hardware of the OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) optical transmission
system (hereafter referred to as the OptiX 155/622H). It covers the equipment structure, board
list and classification, SDH boards, PDH boards, data boards, cross-connect and system control
board, auxiliary boards, and cables. Aided by this document, readers can have a comprehensive
understanding of the hardware of the OptiX 155/622H.
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineers
l Hardware installation engineers
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16
MSTP Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description About This Document
iii
Symbol Description
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
NOTE
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles
are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Revision History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
Changes in Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
This document is the first formal release.
About This Document
iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii
1 Equipment Structure................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1 General Structure.............................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................................1-3
1.2.1 Switch.....................................................................................................................................................1-4
1.2.2 Indicators................................................................................................................................................1-4
1.3 Rear Panel.......................................................................................................................................................1-5
1.3.1 Power Filter Board.................................................................................................................................1-5
1.3.2 Fan Board and Air Filter........................................................................................................................1-5
1.3.3 Board Area.............................................................................................................................................1-7
1.4 Technical Specifications.................................................................................................................................1-7
2 Board List and Classification................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Appearance and Dimensions of the Boards....................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Bar Codes of the Boards..................................................................................................................................2-4
2.3 Board Classification........................................................................................................................................2-4
2.3.1 SDH Boards............................................................................................................................................2-5
2.3.2 PDH Boards............................................................................................................................................2-6
2.3.3 Data Boards............................................................................................................................................2-8
2.3.4 Packet Boards.........................................................................................................................................2-9
2.3.5 Cross-Connect and System Control Board...........................................................................................2-10
2.3.6 Auxiliary Boards..................................................................................................................................2-10
2.3.7 Power Units..........................................................................................................................................2-11
3 SDH Boards................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 OI16D..............................................................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................3-4
3.1.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................3-5
3.1.5 Feature Code..........................................................................................................................................3-5
3.1.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................3-5
3.1.7 Parameter Settings..................................................................................................................................3-5
3.1.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................3-5
Hardware Description Contents
v
3.2 OI4/OI4D........................................................................................................................................................ 3-6
3.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-10
3.2.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-11
3.2.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-12
3.2.6 Feature Code........................................................................................................................................3-12
3.2.7 Parameter Settings................................................................................................................................3-14
3.2.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-15
3.3 OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O...............................................................................................................................3-16
3.3.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-16
3.3.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-18
3.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-21
3.3.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-23
3.3.6 Feature Code........................................................................................................................................3-23
3.4 SB2D/SB2R/SB2L........................................................................................................................................3-27
3.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-31
3.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-32
3.4.6 Feature Code........................................................................................................................................3-32
3.5 SLE/SDE.......................................................................................................................................................3-34
3.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-37
3.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-38
4 PDH Boards.................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2TSP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T.......................................................4-2
4.1.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 4-8
4.1.5 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................4-9
Contents
vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
4.2 SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T...............................................................................................................4-11
4.2.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................4-14
4.2.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................4-16
4.3 PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T..........................................................................................................4-18
4.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................4-21
4.3.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................4-22
5 Data Boards.................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 (Supporting the ML-PPP Protocol)............................................................................5-2
5.1.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................5-6
5.1.5 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................5-7
5.1.6 Feature Code..........................................................................................................................................5-8
5.1.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................5-8
5.2 EFT/ELT2/EGT (Supporting the GFP Protocol)..........................................................................................5-10
5.2.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-14
5.2.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-15
5.2.6 Feature Code........................................................................................................................................5-16
5.3 EFS/EFS4/EFSC/EGS (Supporting the GFP Protocol)................................................................................5-18
5.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-22
vii
5.3.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-24
5.3.6 Feature Code........................................................................................................................................5-24
5.4 AIUD/AIUQ..................................................................................................................................................5-27
5.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-30
5.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-31
5.4.6 Feature Code........................................................................................................................................5-31
5.5 N64/N64Q/FP2D...........................................................................................................................................5-34
5.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-38
5.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-40
5.6 SHLQ............................................................................................................................................................5-42
5.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-44
5.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-45
5.7 TDA...............................................................................................................................................................5-46
5.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-49
5.7.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-50
6 SCB................................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................................6-2
6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................................6-5
6.4 DIP Switches...................................................................................................................................................6-8
Contents
viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
6.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................................6-10
6.6 Valid Slots.....................................................................................................................................................6-16
6.7 Feature Code.................................................................................................................................................6-16
6.8 Parameter Settings.........................................................................................................................................6-19
6.9 Technical Specifications...............................................................................................................................6-20
7 CXP (Packet Plane)CXP.............................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................................7-2
7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................................7-4
7.4 Front Panel...................................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.5 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................................7-9
7.6 Parameter Settings...........................................................................................................................................7-9
7.7 Technical Specifications................................................................................................................................. 7-9
8 Auxiliary Boards.........................................................................................................................8-1
8.1 EMU................................................................................................................................................................8-2
8.1.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 8-4
8.1.5 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................8-4
8.1.7 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................ 8-5
8.2 FAN.................................................................................................................................................................8-5
8.2.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 8-7
8.2.5 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................8-8
9 Power Units.................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 POI/POU......................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.1.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.1.5 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................9-4
9.2 UPM................................................................................................................................................................9-5
ix
9.2.4 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 9-9
9.2.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-10
9.3 220 V Assembly Chassis...............................................................................................................................9-11
9.3.3 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-13
9.3.4 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-14
10 Fibers and Cables...................................................................................................................10-1
10.1 Power Cables and Grounding Cables..........................................................................................................10-2
10.1.1 Equipment Power Cables...................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.2 UPM Power Cables............................................................................................................................10-3
10.1.3 Grounding Cables...............................................................................................................................10-4
10.2 Trunk Cables...............................................................................................................................................10-5
10.2.1 75-ohm 2xE1 Cable............................................................................................................................10-6
10.2.2 75-ohm 4xE1 Cable............................................................................................................................10-7
10.2.3 120/100-ohm 2xE1/T1 Cable.............................................................................................................10-8
10.2.4 120/100-ohm 4xE1/T1 Cable.............................................................................................................10-9
10.2.5 75-ohm 8xE1/T1 Cable....................................................................................................................10-10
10.2.6 75-ohm 16xE1/T1 Cable..................................................................................................................10-12
10.2.7 120-ohm 8xE1/T1 Cable..................................................................................................................10-14
10.2.8 120-ohm 16xE1/T1 Cable................................................................................................................10-16
10.2.9 E3/T3/STM-1 Cable.........................................................................................................................10-18
10.2.10 Framed E1 Cable............................................................................................................................10-19
10.2.11 Nx64 kbit/s Cable...........................................................................................................................10-22
10.2.12 Cable of the TDA...........................................................................................................................10-26
10.3 Ethernet Cables.........................................................................................................................................10-29
10.3.1 Straight Through Cable....................................................................................................................10-29
10.3.2 Crossover Cable...............................................................................................................................10-30
10.4 External Clock Cable................................................................................................................................10-32
10.5 Transparent Data/Housekeeping Data Cable............................................................................................10-33
10.6 Fiber Jumper..............................................................................................................................................10-34
11 Board Information Quicklook.............................................................................................11-1
11.1 Functions of Each Board.............................................................................................................................11-2
11.2 Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces..............................................................................................11-12
11.3 Board Substitution.....................................................................................................................................11-15
11.4 Loopback Capability of the Boards...........................................................................................................11-16
12 Indicators.................................................................................................................................12-1
12.1 Indicators on the Front Panel of the OptiX 155/622H Chassis...................................................................12-2
Contents
x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
12.2 Indicators of the SCB..................................................................................................................................12-3
12.3 Indicators of the CXP..................................................................................................................................12-4
12.4 Indicators on the Optical Interface Boards..................................................................................................12-6
12.5 Indicators on the Ethernet Service Interface Boards...................................................................................12-6
13 Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................13-1
13.1 SDH Boards.................................................................................................................................................13-2
13.2 PDH Boards.................................................................................................................................................13-3
13.3 Data Boards.................................................................................................................................................13-4
13.3.1 SDH Parameters.................................................................................................................................13-5
13.3.2 Ethernet Parameters............................................................................................................................13-6
13.3.3 ATM Parameters................................................................................................................................13-7
14 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board..............................................................14-1
A Glossary..................................................................................................................................... A-1
A.1 Numerics........................................................................................................................................................A-3
A.2 A....................................................................................................................................................................A-3
A.3 B....................................................................................................................................................................A-5
A.4 C....................................................................................................................................................................A-6
A.5 D....................................................................................................................................................................A-8
A.6 E.....................................................................................................................................................................A-9
A.7 F...................................................................................................................................................................A-11
A.8 G..................................................................................................................................................................A-12
A.9 H..................................................................................................................................................................A-13
A.10 I..................................................................................................................................................................A-13
A.11 J..................................................................................................................................................................A-14
A.12 L.................................................................................................................................................................A-14
A.13 M................................................................................................................................................................A-15
A.14 N................................................................................................................................................................A-17
A.15 O................................................................................................................................................................A-17
A.16 P.................................................................................................................................................................A-18
A.17 Q................................................................................................................................................................A-20
A.18 R................................................................................................................................................................A-20
A.19 S.................................................................................................................................................................A-21
A.20 T.................................................................................................................................................................A-23
A.21 U................................................................................................................................................................A-25
A.22 V................................................................................................................................................................A-25
A.23 W...............................................................................................................................................................A-25
B Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................B-1
xi
Figures
Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX 155/622H equipment.................................................................................1-2
Figure 1-2 Appearance of the OptiX 155/622H equipment.................................................................................1-3
Figure 1-3 Appearance of the OptiX 155/622H installed in a 220 V assembly chassis......................................1-3
Figure 1-4 Front panel of the OptiX 155/622H....................................................................................................1-4
Figure 1-5 Power filter board POI/POU...............................................................................................................1-5
Figure 1-6 Fan board and air filter.......................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 1-7 Fan board and air filter.......................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 1-8 Slots....................................................................................................................................................1-7
Figure 3-1 Functional block diagram of the OI16D.............................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-2 Functional block diagram of the OI4/OI4D......................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-3 Front panel of the OI4/OI4D............................................................................................................3-11
Figure 3-4 Front panel of the OI4/OI4D............................................................................................................3-12
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O..............................................................3-20
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O.....................................................................................3-21
Figure 3-7 Front panel of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O.....................................................................................3-22
Figure 3-8 Functional block diagram of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L.......................................................................3-30
Figure 3-9 Front panel of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L..............................................................................................3-31
Figure 3-10 Functional block diagram of the SLE/SDE....................................................................................3-36
Figure 3-11 Front panel of the SLE/SDE...........................................................................................................3-37
Figure 3-12 Front panel of the SLE/SDE...........................................................................................................3-37
Figure 4-1 Functional block diagram of the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T..........................................4-7
Figure 4-2 Front panel of the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T.................................................................4-8
Figure 4-3 Front panel of the SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T...........................................................................4-9
Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T..............................................4-13
Figure 4-5 Front panel of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T.....................................................................4-15
Figure 4-6 Front panel of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T.....................................................................4-16
Figure 4-7 Functional block diagram of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T.........................................4-20
Figure 4-8 Front panel of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T................................................................4-21
Figure 4-9 Front panel of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T................................................................4-22
Figure 5-1 Functional block diagram of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1....................................................................5-5
Figure 5-2 Front panel of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1..........................................................................................5-6
Figure 5-3 Front panel of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D..................................................................................................5-6
Figure 5-4 Functional block diagram of the EFT/ELT2/EGT............................................................................5-13
Hardware Description Figures
xiii
Figure 5-5 Front panel of the EFT/ELT2/EGT..................................................................................................5-14
Figure 5-6 Front panel of the EFT/ELT2/EGT..................................................................................................5-14
Figure 5-7 Functional block diagram of the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4..................................................................5-21
Figure 5-8 Front panel of the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4........................................................................................ 5-23
Figure 5-9 Front panel of the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4........................................................................................ 5-23
Figure 5-10 Functional block diagram of the AIUD/AIUQ...............................................................................5-29
Figure 5-11 Front panel of the AIUD/AIUQ......................................................................................................5-30
Figure 5-12 Front panel of the AIUD/AIUQ......................................................................................................5-30
Figure 5-13 Functional block diagram of the N64N64Q/FP2D.........................................................................5-37
Figure 5-14 Mapping process of the E1 signal...................................................................................................5-38
Figure 5-15 Front panel of the N64/N64Q/FP2D.............................................................................................. 5-39
Figure 5-16 Front panel of the N64Q/FP2D...................................................................................................... 5-39
Figure 5-17 Functional block diagram of the SHLQ......................................................................................... 5-44
Figure 5-18 Front panel of the SHLQ................................................................................................................5-45
Figure 5-19 Functional block diagram of the TDA............................................................................................5-48
Figure 5-20 Front panel of the TDA.................................................................................................................. 5-49
Figure 6-1 Functional block diagram of the SCB................................................................................................6-6
Figure 6-2 DIP switch on the SS46SCB..............................................................................................................6-8
Figure 6-3 DIP switches on the SS49SCB...........................................................................................................6-8
Figure 6-4 Front panel of the SCB.....................................................................................................................6-10
Figure 7-1 Functional block diagram of the CXP................................................................................................7-4
Figure 7-2 Front panel of the CXP.......................................................................................................................7-6
Figure 8-1 Functional block diagram of the EMU...............................................................................................8-3
Figure 8-2 Front panel of the EMU......................................................................................................................8-4
Figure 8-3 Functional block diagram of the FAN................................................................................................8-7
Figure 8-4 Front panel of the FAN.......................................................................................................................8-8
Figure 9-1 Functional block diagram of the POI/POU........................................................................................9-3
Figure 9-2 Front panel of the POI/POU...............................................................................................................9-4
Figure 9-3 Appearance of the power conversion box..........................................................................................9-7
Figure 9-4 Appearance of the storage battery box...............................................................................................9-8
Figure 9-5 Appearance of the storage battery pallet............................................................................................9-8
Figure 9-6 Rear view of the power conversion box.............................................................................................9-9
Figure 9-7 Appearance of the 220 V assembly chassis......................................................................................9-12
Figure 9-8 System structure of the 220 V assembly chassis..............................................................................9-13
Figure 9-9 Appearance of the power conversion module.................................................................................. 9-14
Figure 10-1 Structure of the equipment power cable.........................................................................................10-2
Figure 10-2 Structure of the AC power cable from the mains to the UPM........................................................10-3
Figure 10-3 Structure of the power cable from the UPM power box to the battery box....................................10-3
Figure 10-4 Structure of the power cable from the UPM power box to the output terminals of the battery.....10-4
Figure 10-5 Structure of the grounding cable.....................................................................................................10-4
Figure 10-6 Structure of the 75-ohm 2xE1 cable...............................................................................................10-6
Figure 10-7 Structure of the 75-ohm 4xE1 cable...............................................................................................10-7
Figures
xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Figure 10-8 Structure of the 120/100-ohm 2xE1/T1 cable................................................................................ 10-8
Figure 10-9 Structure of the 120/100-ohm 4xE1/T1 cable..............................................................................10-10
Figure 10-10 Structure of the 75-ohm 8xE1/T1 cable......................................................................................10-11
Figure 10-11 Structure of the 75-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable....................................................................................10-12
Figure 10-12 Structure of the 120-ohm 8xE1/T1 cable....................................................................................10-15
Figure 10-13 Structure of the 120-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable..................................................................................10-16
Figure 10-14 Structure of the E3/T3/STM-1 cable..........................................................................................10-18
Figure 10-15 Structure of the Framed E1 cable...............................................................................................10-19
Figure 10-16 Pins of the DB78 connector........................................................................................................10-19
Figure 10-17 Structure of the V.35 DCE cable used on the N64/N64Q..........................................................10-22
Figure 10-18 Structure of the V.35 DTE cable used on theN64/N64Q...........................................................10-23
Figure 10-20 Structure of the V.24 DTE cable used on the N64/N64Q..........................................................10-24
Figure 10-22 Structure of the V.21 DTE cable used on the N64/N64Q..........................................................10-24
Figure 10-23 Structure of the RS-449 DCE cable used on the N64/N64Q......................................................10-25
Figure 10-24 Structure of the RS-449 DTE cable used on the N64/N64Q......................................................10-25
Figure 10-25 Structure of the EIA-530 DCE cable used on the N64/N64Q....................................................10-26
Figure 10-26 Structure of the EIA-530 DTE cable used on the N64/N64Q....................................................10-26
Figure 10-27 Structure of the RS-232 (RS-422) cable of the TDA.................................................................10-26
Figure 10-28 Structure of the audio cable of the TDA.....................................................................................10-28
Figure 10-29 Structure of the straight through cable........................................................................................10-29
Figure 10-30 Structure of the crossover cable..................................................................................................10-31
Figure 10-31 Structure of the external clock cable..........................................................................................10-32
Figure 10-32 Structure of the transparent data/housekeeping data cable.........................................................10-33
Figure 10-33 SC fiber jumper..........................................................................................................................10-35
Figure 10-34 FC fiber jumper..........................................................................................................................10-35
Figure 10-35 LC fiber jumper..........................................................................................................................10-36
Hardware Description Figures
xv
Tables
Table 2-1 Appearance and dimensions of the boards used on the OptiX 155/622H............................................2-2
Table 2-2 Appearance and dimensions of the boards used on the OptiX 155/622H............................................2-3
Table 2-3 SDH boards supported by the OptiX 155/622H..................................................................................2-5
Table 2-4 SDH boards supported by the OptiX 155/622H..................................................................................2-5
Table 2-5 PDH boards supported by the OptiX 155/622H..................................................................................2-6
Table 2-6 PDH boards supported by the OptiX 155/622H..................................................................................2-7
Table 2-7 Data boards supported by the OptiX 155/622H...................................................................................2-8
Table 2-8 Data boards supported by the OptiX 155/622H...................................................................................2-9
Table 2-9 Packet boards supported by the OptiX 155/622H..............................................................................2-10
Table 2-10 Cross-connect and system control board supported by the OptiX 155/622H..................................2-10
Table 2-11 Auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX 155/622H.......................................................................2-10
Table 2-12 Auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX 155/622H.......................................................................2-10
Table 2-13 Power units supported by the OptiX 155/622H...............................................................................2-11
Table 2-14 Power units supported by the OptiX 155/622H...............................................................................2-11
Table 3-1 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-3
Table 3-2 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the OI16D..............................................................3-5
Table 3-3 Versions of the OI4..............................................................................................................................3-7
Table 3-4 Versions of the OI4..............................................................................................................................3-7
Table 3-5 Versions of the OI4D...........................................................................................................................3-8
Table 3-6 Functions and features of the OI4/OI4D..............................................................................................3-9
Table 3-7 Indicator on the front panel of the OI4/OI4D....................................................................................3-12
Table 3-8 Relationship between the feature code of the OI4 and the type of optical interface..........................3-13
Table 3-9 Relationship between the feature code of the OI4 and the type of optical interface..........................3-13
Table 3-10 Relationship between the feature code of the OI4D and the type of optical interface.....................3-14
Table 3-12 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the OI4/OI4D.....................................................3-15
Table 3-13 Versions of the OI2S........................................................................................................................3-16
Table 3-14 Versions of the OI2S........................................................................................................................3-17
Table 3-15 Versions of the OI2D.......................................................................................................................3-17
Table 3-16 Versions of the OI2D.......................................................................................................................3-18
Table 3-17 Functions and features of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O..................................................................3-18
Table 3-18 Indicator on the front panel of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O...........................................................3-22
Table 3-19 Relationship between the feature code of the OI2S and the type of optical interface.....................3-23
Hardware Description Tables
xvii
Table 3-20 Relationship between the feature code of the OI2S and the type of optical interface.....................3-23
Table 3-23 Relationship between the feature code of the SL1Q and the type of optical interface....................3-25
Table 3-24 Relationship between the feature code of the SL1Q and the type of optical interface....................3-25
Table 3-25 Relationship between the feature code of the SL1O and the type of optical interface....................3-25
Table 3-26 Relationship between the feature code of the SL1O and the type of optical interface....................3-25
Table 3-27 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O.............................3-26
Table 3-28 Functions and features of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L...........................................................................3-29
Table 3-29 Indicator on the front panel of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L....................................................................3-31
Table 3-30 Relationship between the feature code of the SB2D and the type of optical interface....................3-32
Table 3-31 Relationship between the feature code of the SB2R and the type of optical interface....................3-32
Table 3-32 Relationship between the feature code of the SB2L and the type of optical interface....................3-33
Table 3-33 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L.......................................3-33
Table 3-34 Functions and features of the SLE/SDE...........................................................................................3-35
Table 3-35 Indicator on the front panel of the SLE/SDE...................................................................................3-38
Table 3-36 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the SLE/SDE..................................................3-38
Table 4-1 Versions of the SP1S............................................................................................................................4-2
Table 4-2 Versions of the SP1D...........................................................................................................................4-3
Table 4-3 Versions of the PD2S...........................................................................................................................4-3
Table 4-4 Versions of the PD2D..........................................................................................................................4-4
Table 4-5 Versions of the PD2T...........................................................................................................................4-4
Table 4-6 Functions and features of the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T.................................................4-5
Table 4-7 Functions and features of the SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T..........................................................4-6
Table 4-8 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T
.............................................................................................................................................................................4-10
Table 4-9 Functions and features of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T....................................................4-12
Table 4-10 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T..........4-17
Table 4-11 Functions and features of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T..............................................4-19
Table 4-12 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T
.............................................................................................................................................................................4-23
Table 5-1 Functions and features of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1..........................................................................5-3
Table 5-2 Functions and features of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D..................................................................................5-4
Table 5-3 Indicators on the front panel of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1.................................................................5-7
Table 5-4 Relationship between the feature code of the EF1 and the type of optical interface...........................5-8
Table 5-5 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1.................................5-8
Table 5-6 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EF1...................................................................5-9
Table 5-7 Functions and features of the EFT/ELT2/EGT..................................................................................5-11
Table 5-8 Indicators on the front panel of the EFT/ELT2/EGT.........................................................................5-15
Table 5-9 Relationship between the feature code of the ELT2 and the type of optical interface......................5-16
Table 5-10 Relationship between the feature code of the EGT6 and the type of optical interface....................5-16
Table 5-11 Relationship between the feature code of the EGT and the type of optical interface......................5-16
Table 5-12 Relationship between the feature code of the EGT and the type of optical interface......................5-16
Tables
xviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 5-13 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EFT...........................................................5-17
Table 5-14 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the ELT2............................................................5-17
Table 5-15 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EGT..............................................................5-18
Table 5-16 Functions and features of the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4......................................................................5-19
Table 5-17 Indicators on the front panel of the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4.............................................................5-24
Table 5-18 Relationship between the feature code of the EGS and the type of optical interface......................5-25
Table 5-19 Relationship between the feature code of the EGS and the type of optical interface......................5-25
Table 5-20 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EFS/EFSC/EFS4......................................5-25
Table 5-21 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EGS..............................................................5-26
Table 5-22 Functions and features of the AIUD/AIUQ.....................................................................................5-28
Table 5-23 Indicators on the front panel of the AIUD/AIUQ............................................................................5-30
Table 5-24 Interfaces of the AIUD/AIUQ..........................................................................................................5-31
Table 5-25 Relationship between the feature code of the AIUD and the type of optical interface....................5-32
Table 5-26 Relationship between the feature code of the AIUQ and the type of optical interface....................5-32
Table 5-27 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the AIUD/AIUQ................................................ 5-33
Table 5-28 Functions and features of the N64/N64Q/FP2D..............................................................................5-35
Table 5-29 Functions and features of the N64Q/FP2D......................................................................................5-35
Table 5-30 Serial port management parameters that need to be set for the N64/N64Q.....................................5-40
Table 5-31 Serial port management parameters that need to be set for the N64Q.............................................5-40
Table 5-32 Framed E1 interface parameters that need to be set for the N64/FP2D...........................................5-41
Table 5-33 Framed E1 interface parameters that need to be set for the FP2D...................................................5-41
Table 5-34 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the N64/N64Q/FP2D..................................... 5-41
Table 5-35 Functions and features of the SHLQ................................................................................................5-43
Table 5-36 DSL interface parameters that need to be set for the SHLQ............................................................5-45
Table 5-37 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the SHLQ.......................................................5-46
Table 5-38 Indicator on the front panel of the TDA...........................................................................................5-49
Table 5-39 Mapping relation between the accessed audio signal and the silkscreen.........................................5-50
Table 5-40 Wire color of an RS-232/RS-422 cable and the corresponding signal............................................ 5-50
Table 5-41 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the TDA......................................................... 5-51
Table 6-1 Versions of the SCB.............................................................................................................................6-2
Table 6-2 Versions of the SCB.............................................................................................................................6-2
Table 6-3 Functions and features of the SCB.......................................................................................................6-3
Table 6-4 DIP switches on the SCB.....................................................................................................................6-9
Table 6-5 DIP switch SW1...................................................................................................................................6-9
Table 6-6 DIP switch SW2...................................................................................................................................6-9
Table 6-7 Description of the front panel of the SCB..........................................................................................6-10
Table 6-8 Indicators on the front panel of the SCB............................................................................................6-11
Table 6-9 Pin assignments of the SYNC 1/2 external clock interface............................................................... 6-13
Table 6-10 Pin assignments of the Ethernet NM interface.................................................................................6-13
Table 6-11 Pin assignments of the COM2, ALM OUT1, and MODEM(F) interface....................................... 6-14
Table 6-12 Pin assignments of the COM3 and OUT2 interface.........................................................................6-14
Table 6-13 Pin assignments of the COM4(F3) and IN1/2 interface...................................................................6-15
xix
Table 6-14 Pin assignments of the F2 and IN3/4 interface................................................................................ 6-15
Table 6-15 Pin assignments of the PHONE interface........................................................................................6-16
Table 6-16 Relationship between the feature code of the SCB and the type of optical interface......................6-16
Table 6-17 Relationship between the feature code of the SCB and the type of optical interface......................6-18
Table 6-18 Parameters that need to be set for the SCB......................................................................................6-20
Table 7-1 Functional features of the CXP board..................................................................................................7-2
Table 7-2 Description of the front panel of the CXP...........................................................................................7-6
Table 7-3 Indicators of the CXP...........................................................................................................................7-7
Table 7-4 Clock and temperature parameters.......................................................................................................7-9
Table 7-5 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the CXP..............................................................7-9
Table 7-6 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the CXP................................................................7-10
Table 7-7 Performance specifications of the GE optical interfaces on the OptiX 155/622H.............................7-11
Table 8-1 Parameters that need to be set for the EMU.........................................................................................8-5
Table 8-2 Versions of FAN..................................................................................................................................8-6
Table 9-1 Versions of the POI/POU.....................................................................................................................9-2
Table 9-2 Functions and features of the POI/POU...............................................................................................9-3
Table 9-3 Interfaces of the POI/POU...................................................................................................................9-4
Table 9-4 Parameters that need to be set for the CAU.......................................................................................9-10
Table 9-5 Technical specifications of the UPM.................................................................................................9-10
Table 9-6 Indicators of the power conversion module.......................................................................................9-14
Table 9-7 Technical specifications of the 220 V assembly chassis....................................................................9-15
Table 9-8 Technical specifications of the power conversion module................................................................9-15
Table 10-1 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm 2xE1 cable.....................................................................................10-6
Table 10-2 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm 4xE1 cable.....................................................................................10-8
Table 10-3 Pin assignments of the 120/100-ohm 2xE1/T1 cable.......................................................................10-9
Table 10-4 Pin assignments of the 120/100-ohm 4xE1/T1 cable.....................................................................10-10
Table 10-5 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm 8xE1/T1 cable..............................................................................10-11
Table 10-6 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable............................................................................10-13
Table 10-7 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm 8xE1/T1 cable............................................................................10-15
Table 10-8 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable..........................................................................10-17
Table 10-9 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm Framed E1 cable..........................................................................10-20
Table 10-10 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm Framed E1 cable .....................................................................10-21
Table 10-11 Pin assignments of the RS-232 cable of the TDA........................................................................10-27
Table 10-12 Pin assignments of the RS-422 cable of the TDA........................................................................10-27
Table 10-13 Pin assignments of the audio cable of the TDA...........................................................................10-28
Table 10-14 Pin assignments of the straight through cable..............................................................................10-30
Table 10-15 Pin assignments of the crossover cable........................................................................................10-31
Table 10-16 Technical specifications of the crossover cable...........................................................................10-31
Table 10-17 Technical specifications of the external clock cable....................................................................10-33
Table 10-18 Technical specifications of the transparent data/housekeeping data cable..................................10-34
Table 11-1 Functions of the SDH boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses..........................................................11-2
Table 11-2 Functions of the SDH boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses..........................................................11-3
Tables
xx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 11-3 Functions of the PDH boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses..........................................................11-4
Table 11-4 Functions of the PDH boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses.......................................................... 11-6
Table 11-5 Functions of the data boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses............................................................11-7
Table 11-6 Functions of the data boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses..........................................................11-10
Table 11-7 Functions of the packet boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses......................................................11-12
Table 11-8 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses........11-12
Table 11-9 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses........11-14
Table 11-10 Boards that can be substituted by other boards............................................................................11-16
Table 11-11 Loopback capability of the SDH boards......................................................................................11-16
Table 11-12 Loopback capability of the SDH boards......................................................................................11-17
Table 11-13 Loopback capability of the PDH boards......................................................................................11-18
Table 11-14 Loopback capability of the PDH boards......................................................................................11-19
Table 11-15 Loopback capability of the data boards........................................................................................11-19
Table 11-16 Loopback capability of the data boards........................................................................................11-20
Table 11-17 Loopback capability of the ATM boards.....................................................................................11-21
Table 11-18 Loopback capability of the packet boards....................................................................................11-22
Table 12-1 Indicators on the front panel of the OptiX 155/622H chassis..........................................................12-2
Table 12-2 Indicators on the front panel of the SCB..........................................................................................12-3
Table 12-3 Indicators of the CXP.......................................................................................................................12-4
Table 12-4 Indicators on the optical interface boards........................................................................................ 12-6
Table 12-5 Indicators on the Ethernet service interface boards......................................................................... 12-7
Table 13-1 Relation between the service type and the value of the C2 byte......................................................13-2
Table 13-2 Relation between the service type and the value of the C2 byte......................................................13-3
Table 13-3 Relation between the service type and the value of the V5 byte......................................................13-4
Table 14-1 Power consumption and weight of each board................................................................................ 14-1
xxi
1 Equipment Structure
About This Chapter
The OptiX 155/622H adopts the compact case-shaped design, and comprises the chassis, fan
board, board area, and power board.
1.1 General Structure
The OptiX 155/622H adopts the compact case-shaped design. Hence, it can be used as stand-
alone equipment or be housed in a 220 V chassis.The OptiX 155/622H adopts the compact case-
shaped design.
1.2 Front Panel
This topic describes the switch and indicators on the front panel.
1.3 Rear Panel
The rear panel consists of the power filter board, fan board, air filter, and board area.
1.4 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the OptiX 155/622H include the dimensions, weight, and power
consumption of the chassis.
Hardware Description 1 Equipment Structure
1-1
1.1 General Structure
The OptiX 155/622H adopts the compact case-shaped design. Hence, it can be used as stand-
alone equipment or be housed in a 220 V chassis.The OptiX 155/622H adopts the compact case-
shaped design.
The dimensions of the OptiX 155/622H equipment are as follows: 436 mm (width) x 293 mm
(depth) x 86 mm (height). The appearance of the OptiX 155/622H equipment is shown in Figure
1-1Figure 1-2.
Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX 155/622H equipment
Chassis
Fan board
Board area
POI/POU

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Figure 1-2 Appearance of the OptiX 155/622H equipment
Chassis
Fan board
Board area
POI/POU

When the OptiX 155/622H is housed in a 220 V assembly chassis, the appearance of the OptiX
155/622H is shown in Figure 1-3.
In the 220 V assembly chassis, the OptiX 155/622H uses a power module instead of the power
board POI/POU.
Figure 1-3 Appearance of the OptiX 155/622H installed in a 220 V assembly chassis
220 V assembly chassis
OptiX 155/622H
Power module

1.2 Front Panel
This topic describes the switch and indicators on the front panel.
1-3
1.2.1 Switch
ALMCUT is a black switch on the left side of the front panel of the OptiX 155/622H. The
ALMCUT switch is used to mute an alarm sound.
1.2.2 Indicators
The front panel of the OptiX 155/622H has five indicators on the right side. The indicators are
used to indicate the running status and alarms of the equipment.
1.2.1 Switch
ALMCUT is a black switch on the left side of the front panel of the OptiX 155/622H. The
ALMCUT switch is used to mute an alarm sound.
Figure 1-4 illustrates the front panel of the OptiX 155/622H.
Figure 1-4 Front panel of the OptiX 155/622H
HUAWEI
ETN RUN R Y FAN
OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000)
ALMCUT ALMON
ALM
R: critical alarm indicator
Y: major alarm indicator
FAN: fan alarm indicator
RUN: running indicator
ETN: Ethernet indicator
ALMCUT: alarm mute switch

When a critical or major alarm occurs, an alarm sound is generated and the corresponding alarm
indicator on the front panel flashes. You can turn the ALMCUT switch from ALMON to
ALMCUT to mute the alarm sound.
CAUTION
l When the ALMCUT switch is in position ALMCUT, the audible alarm is completely muted,
and the equipment does not generate an audible alert even when a new alarm occurs.
l When the equipment is operating normally or after an alarm is cleared, set the switch to
position ALMON so that the audible and visual alarm can be reported in the case of a new
fault.
1.2.2 Indicators
The front panel of the OptiX 155/622H has five indicators on the right side. The indicators are
used to indicate the running status and alarms of the equipment.
For the meanings of the indicators, see Figure 1-4. For the detailed description of the indicators,
see 12 Indicators.
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
1.3 Rear Panel
The rear panel consists of the power filter board, fan board, air filter, and board area.
For detailed information on the rear panel, see Figure 1-1Figure 1-2.
1.3.1 Power Filter Board
The OptiX 155/622H can be configured with two types of power filter boards: -48 V power filter
board and +24 V power filter board.
1.3.2 Fan Board and Air Filter
The fan board of the OptiX 155/622H is used to dissipate heat and the air filter is used to prevent
dust from entering the equipment.
1.3.3 Board Area
The board area of the OptiX 155/622H houses service boards.
1.3.1 Power Filter Board
The OptiX 155/622H can be configured with two types of power filter boards: -48 V power filter
board and +24 V power filter board.
The power filter board POI/POU is on the right side of the OptiX 155/622H.
Figure 1-5 Power filter board POI/POU
Power interface
Power switch
Power interface
Grounding terminal

As shown in Figure 1-5, there are two power input interfaces on the front panel of the POI/POU.
Hence, the POI/POU can access two -48 V or +24 V power supplies at the same time. The two
power supplies function as a mutual backup for each other. A grounding terminal is used to
connect the PGND end of a power cable below the power input interface.
1.3.2 Fan Board and Air Filter
The fan board of the OptiX 155/622H is used to dissipate heat and the air filter is used to prevent
dust from entering the equipment.
The fan board and air filter are shown in Figure 1-6Figure 1-7. If the fan alarm indicators are
on or a fan alarm (FAN_FAIL) is reported to the network management system (NMS), it
1-5
indicates that at least one fan does not operate properly. In this case, check the fan board. Ensure
that you clean the air filter once every two weeks.
Figure 1-6 Fan board and air filter
Fan board
Air filter

Figure 1-7 Fan board and air filter
Fan board
Air filter

Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
1.3.3 Board Area
The board area of the OptiX 155/622H houses service boards.
The board area provides five slots as shown in Figure 1-8. The SCB slot is always used for the
SCB board and slots IU1-IU4 are used for service interface boards. The height of the front panels
of the IU slots is 24 mm.
Figure 1-8 Slots
F
A
N
P
O
I
SCB slot
IU4
IU3 IU2 IU1

The technical specifications of the OptiX 155/622H include the dimensions, weight, and power
consumption of the chassis.
Item Value
Chassis dimensions
(mm)
436 (width) x 293 (depth) x 86 (height)
Maximum weight (kg) 10
Maximum power
consumption (W)
100

1-7
2 Board List and Classification
About This Chapter
This topic describes the appearance, dimensions, bar code, and classification of the boards used
on the OptiX 155/622H.
2.1 Appearance and Dimensions of the Boards
Different boards have different appearance and dimensions.
2.2 Bar Codes of the Boards
The bar code on the front panel of a board indicates the version, name, and feature code of the
board.
2.3 Board Classification
This topic describes the board categories that the OptiX 155/622H supports according to the
functions of the boards.
Hardware Description 2 Board List and Classification
2-1
2.1 Appearance and Dimensions of the Boards
Different boards have different appearance and dimensions.
Table 2-1Table 2-2 provides information about the appearance and dimensions of the boards
used on the OptiX 155/622H.
Table 2-1 Appearance and dimensions of the boards used on the OptiX 155/622H
Param
eter
Appearance and Dimensions
Board
appeara
nce
Board
classifi
cation
Service processing board System control board
Height
(mm)
24.0 24.0
Depth
(mm)
218.5 218.5
Width
(mm)
89.0/321.0 321.0
Note: The following figure illustrates the three dimensions. "H" and "W" indicate the height
and width of the front panel respectively and "D" indicates the depth of the printed circuit
board (PCB).
H
D W

Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 2-2 Appearance and dimensions of the boards used on the OptiX 155/622H
Param
eter
Appearance and Dimensions
Board
appeara
nce
Board
classifi
cation
Service processing board System control board
Height
(mm)
24.0 24.0
Depth
(mm)
218.5 218.5
Width
(mm)
89.0/321.0 321.0
Note: The following figure illustrates the three dimensions. "H" and "W" indicate the height
and width of the front panel respectively and "D" indicates the depth of the printed circuit
board (PCB).
H
D W

DANGER
Do not look directly at an optical interface or a fiber interface. The laser beams inside the fiber
can damage your eyes.
CAUTION
Wear an antistatic wrist strap when holding a board. To prevent the static discharge from
damaging the board, ensure that the antistatic wrist strap is properly grounded.
2-3
CAUTION
l A level optical module cannot be directly connected to an optical attenuator. If an optical
attenuator is required, use the attenuator on the optical distribution frame (ODF) side.
l Add an attenuator when performing a hardware loopback to prevent very high optical power
from damaging the receive optical module. Insert the attenuator in the IN interface instead
of the OUT interface.
2.2 Bar Codes of the Boards
The bar code on the front panel of a board indicates the version, name, and feature code of the
board.
Two types of bar codes are used for the boards of the OptiX 155/622H.
l 16-digit manufacturing code + board version + board name + board feature code
l 20-digit manufacturing code + board version + board name + board feature code
NOTE
The feature code of an optical interface board indicates the type of optical interfaces on the board. For
details on the feature code of a board, see the topic that describes the feature code of the board.
2.3 Board Classification
This topic describes the board categories that the OptiX 155/622H supports according to the
functions of the boards.
2.3.1 SDH Boards
The OptiX 155/622H supports STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 line boards.
2.3.2 PDH Boards
The OptiX 155/622H supports the PDH boards that operate at different rates and have different
impedances.
2.3.3 Data Boards
The OptiX 155/622H supports the data boards that provide the transmission function and
switching function.
2.3.4 Packet Boards
The OptiX 155/622H supports the packet boards that operate at different rates.
2.3.5 Cross-Connect and System Control Board
The system control and communication unit (SCC), cross-connect unit (XC), synchronous
timing generator (STG), engineering orderwire unit (EOW), STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 line unit
(OI2D/OI4D/OI16D), and E1 tributary unit (SP2D) are integrated on the SCB of the OptiX
155/622H.
2.3.6 Auxiliary Boards
The OptiX 155/622H supports auxiliary boards such as the environmental monitoring board and
fan board.
2.3.7 Power Units
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
The OptiX 155/622H supports power units such as the POI/POU, 220 V assembly chassis and
UPM.
2.3.1 SDH Boards
The OptiX 155/622H supports STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 line boards.
Table 2-3Table 2-4 provides the names and descriptions of the SDH boards that the OptiX
155/622H supports and the slots valid for the SDH boards.
Table 2-3 SDH boards supported by the OptiX 155/622H
Board Description Valid Slot
OI16D 2xSTM-16 optical interface board The OI16D is integrated with the
SCB.
OI4 1xSTM-4 optical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
OI4D 2xSTM-4 optical interface board IU1, IU2, IU3, or integrated with
the SCB
OI2S 1xSTM-1 optical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
OI2D 2xSTM-1 optical interface board IU1, IU2, IU3, or integrated with
the SCB
SL1Q 4xSTM-1 optical interface board IU4
SL1O 8xSTM-1 optical interface board IU4
SB2L 1xSTM-1 single-fiber bidirectional
optical interface board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
SB2R 1xSTM-1 single-fiber bidirectional
IU1, IU2, and IU3
SB2D 2xSTM-1 single-fiber bidirectional
IU1, IU2, and IU3
SLE 1xSTM-1 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
SDE 2xSTM-1 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3

Table 2-4 SDH boards supported by the OptiX 155/622H
OI16D 2xSTM-16 optical interface board The OI16D is integrated with the SCB.
OI4 1xSTM-4 optical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
OI4D 2xSTM-4 optical interface board IU1, IU2, IU3, or integrated with the
SCB
OI2S 1xSTM-1 optical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
2-5
OI2D 2xSTM-1 optical interface board IU1, IU2, IU3, or integrated with the
SCB
SL1Q 4xSTM-1 optical interface board IU4
SL1O 8xSTM-1 optical interface board IU4
SLE 1xSTM-1 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
SDE 2xSTM-1 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3

2.3.2 PDH Boards
The OptiX 155/622H supports the PDH boards that operate at different rates and have different
impedances.
The PDH boards are used to access E1, E1/T1, and E3/T3 tributary services.
Table 2-5Table 2-6 provides the names and descriptions of the PDH boards that the OptiX
155/622H supports and the slots valid for the PDH boards.
Table 2-5 PDH boards supported by the OptiX 155/622H
SP1S 4xE1 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
SP1D 8xE1 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
SP2D 16xE1 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, IU3, or integrated
with the SCB
PD2S 16xE1 electrical interface board IU4
PD2D 32xE1 electrical interface board IU4
PD2T 48xE1 electrical interface board IU4
SM1S 4xE1/T1 electrical interface
board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
SM1D 8xE1/T1 electrical interface
board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
PM2S 16xE1/T1 electrical interface
board
IU4
PM2D 32xE1/T1 electrical interface
board
IU4
PM2T 48xE1/T1 electrical interface
board
IU4
PE3S 1xE3 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
PE3D 2xE3 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
PE3T 3xE3 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
PT3S 1xT3 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
PT3D 2xT3 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
PT3T 3xT3 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3

Table 2-6 PDH boards supported by the OptiX 155/622H
SP1D 8xE1 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
SP2D 16xE1 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, IU3, or integrated
with the SCB
PD2S 16xE1 electrical interface board IU4
PD2D 32xE1 electrical interface board IU4
PD2T 48xE1 electrical interface board IU4
board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
board
IU4
board
IU4
board
IU4
PE3S 1xE3 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
PE3D 2xE3 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
PE3T 3xE3 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
PT3S 1xT3 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
PT3D 2xT3 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
PT3T 3xT3 electrical interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3

2-7
2.3.3 Data Boards
The OptiX 155/622H supports the data boards that provide the transmission function and
switching function.
Table 2-7Table 2-8 provides the names and descriptions of the data boards that the OptiX
155/622H supports and the slots valid for the data boards.
Table 2-7 Data boards supported by the OptiX 155/622H
ET1 8-port Ethernet service interface
board
IU4
ET1O 8-port Ethernet service electrical
interface board
IU4
ET1D 2-port Ethernet service electrical
interface board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
EF1 6-port Ethernet service interface
board
IU4
ELT2 2-port 100M Ethernet optical
interface board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
AIUD 2-port ATM interface board IU4
AIUQ 4-port ATM interface board IU4
SHLQ Single-pair high-speed digital
subscriber line board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
EFS 4-port Ethernet service switching
board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
EFS4 4-port Ethernet service switching
board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
EFT 4-port Ethernet service interface
board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
EGS 1-port 1000M Ethernet service
switching board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
EFSC 12-port Ethernet service switching
board
IU4
EGT 1-port 1000M Ethernet transparent
transmission board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
N64 Nx64 kbit/s interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
N64Q 4xNx64 kbit/s interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
FP2D 16xFramed E1 electrical interface
board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
TDA Multiple-channel audio and data
access board
IU4

Table 2-8 Data boards supported by the OptiX 155/622H
board
IU4
interface board
IU4
interface board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
interface board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
AIUD 2-port ATM interface board IU4
AIUQ 4-port ATM interface board IU4
board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
switching board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
board
IU4
transmission board
IU1, IU2, and IU3
N64Q 4xNx64 kbit/s interface board IU1, IU2, and IU3
board
IU1, IU2, and IU3

2.3.4 Packet Boards
The OptiX 155/622H supports the packet boards that operate at different rates.
Table 2-9 provides the names and descriptions of the packet boards that the OptiX 155/622H
supports and the slots valid for the packet boards.
2-9
Table 2-9 Packet boards supported by the OptiX 155/622H
CXP Integrated mixed-service
processing board
IU4

2.3.5 Cross-Connect and System Control Board
The system control and communication unit (SCC), cross-connect unit (XC), synchronous
timing generator (STG), engineering orderwire unit (EOW), STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 line unit
(OI2D/OI4D/OI16D), and E1 tributary unit (SP2D) are integrated on the SCB of the OptiX
155/622H.
Table 2-10 provides the name and description of the cross-connect and system control board
that the OptiX 155/622H supports and the slot valid for the cross-connect and system control
board.
Table 2-10 Cross-connect and system control board supported by the OptiX 155/622H
SCB System control board SCB

2.3.6 Auxiliary Boards
The OptiX 155/622H supports auxiliary boards such as the environmental monitoring board and
fan board.
Table 2-11Table 2-12 provides the names and descriptions of the auxiliary boards that the OptiX
155/622H supports and the slots valid for the auxiliary boards.
Table 2-11 Auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX 155/622H
EMU Environmental monitoring
board
IU3
FAN Fan board FAN

Table 2-12 Auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX 155/622H
FAN Fan board FAN

Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
2.3.7 Power Units
The OptiX 155/622H supports power units such as the POI/POU, 220 V assembly chassis and
UPM.
Table 2-13Table 2-14 provides the names and descriptions of the power units that the OptiX
155/622H supports and the slots valid for the power units.
Table 2-13 Power units supported by the OptiX 155/622H
POI/POU Power board POI/POU
UPM Dedicated power system -
220 V assembly
chassis
Built-in assembly -

Table 2-14 Power units supported by the OptiX 155/622H
POI/POU Power board POI/POU
UPM Dedicated power system -

2-11
3 SDH Boards
About This Chapter
This topic describes the SDH boards at the STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 levels.
3.1 OI16D
This topic describes the version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and
technical specifications of the OI16D.
3.2 OI4/OI4D
technical specifications of the OI4/OI4D.
3.3 OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O
technical specifications of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O.
3.4 SB2D/SB2R/SB2L
technical specifications of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L.
3.5 SLE/SDE
technical specifications of the SLE/SDE.
Hardware Description 3 SDH Boards
3-1
3.1 OI16D
technical specifications of the OI16D.
3.1.1 Version Description
The OI16D is integrated with the SCB and does not have an independent version.
3.1.2 Functions and Features
The OI16D transmits and receives 2xSTM-16 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the
STM-16 optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the
line.
3.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The OI16D consists of the O/E converting module, data and clock restoration module, SDH
overhead processing module, logic control module, and power unit.
3.1.4 Front Panel
The OI16D does not have an independent front panel because it is integrated with the SCB.
3.1.5 Feature Code
The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the feature code of the board.
The feature code indicates the type of optical interface.
3.1.6 Valid Slots
The OI16D does not have an independent slot because it is integrated with the SCB.
3.1.7 Parameter Settings
You can set the parameters for the OI16D by using the T2000.
3.1.8 Technical Specifications
The OI16D is integrated with the SCB. This topic provides the parameters specified for the
optical interfaces of the OI16D. For the other technical specifications of the OI16D, see the topic
that describes the technical specifications of the SCB.
The OI16D is integrated with the SCB and does not have an independent version.
The OI16D transmits and receives 2xSTM-16 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the
line.
The OI16D is a 2xSTM-16 optical interface board. The OI16D is integrated with the SCB. When
an LC optical connector is used, the maintenance of the optical module is convenient.
Table 3-1 provides the functions and features of the OI16D.
3 SDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 3-1 Functions and Features
Functions and
Features
OI16D
Basic functions Transmits and receives 2xSTM-4 optical signals.
Specifications
of the optical
interface
Supports standard optical interfaces, namely, the S-16.1. The
characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957.
Functions of the
optical module
Provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
The optical interface supports the function of setting the on/off state of a
laser.
Service
processing
Supports the processing of the VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 services.
Time
synchronization
function
Supports the high-precision time synchronization function to realize the
synchronization of time over the entire network.
Overhead
processing
l Processes the section overheads of STM-16 signals.
l Processes higher order path overheads.
l Supports the setting of K-byte reporting, K-byte transmitting, and K-
byte passing-through.
l Provides the transparent data communication channel (DCC) and
orderwire byte channel.
l Supports the setting and querying of the J0/J1/C2 byte.
Pointer
processing
Processes the AU pointer.
Alarms and
performance
events
Provides rich alarms and performance events, thus facilitating the
management and maintenance of the equipment.
Protection
modes
l Supports the sub-network connection protection (SNCP).
l Supports the MSP ring
l Supports the linear MSP
Maintenance
features
l Supports inloop and outloop at optical interfaces.
l Supports inloop and outloop on VC-4 paths so that faults can be located
quickly.
l Supports the setting of the overhead byte to be sent/received.
l Supports the setting of the enabled state of the synchronization status
message (SSM) on the line optical interface.
l Supports the pass-through test of the line K bytes.
l Supports the setting of the bit error threshold-crossing values and
degrade thresholds.
l Provides the ALS function.
3-3

The OI16D consists of the O/E converting module, data and clock restoration module, SDH
Figure 3-1 shows the functional block diagram of the OI16D.
Figure 3-1 Functional block diagram of the OI16D
Data and clock
restoration
module
SDH
overhead
processing
module
Logic control
module
STM-16
STM-16
Cross-connect
unit
O/E
conversion
E/O
SCC unit
5 V
Fuse
5 V
conversion Cross-connect
unit
Backplane

Receive Direction
The O/E converting module converts a received STM-16 optical signal into an STM-16 electrical
signal and sends the STM-16 electrical signal to the data and clock restoration module. The
R_LOS alarm signal can be detected in the O/E converting module. The data and clock
restoration module restores the clock signal and sends the clock signal and the STM-16 electrical
signal to the SDH overhead processing module. Then, the SDH overhead processing module
extracts the overhead bytes from the received STM-16 signal and sends the payload signal to
the cross-connect unit through the backplane. The R_LOF alarm signal, R_OOF alarm signal,
and other alarm signals are detected in the SDH overhead processing module.
Transmit Direction
The SDH overhead processing module inserts the overhead bytes into the electrical signal sent
from the cross-connect unit and sends the electrical signal to the E/O converting module. Then,
the E/O converting module converts the STM-16 electrical signal into an STM-16 optical signal
and sends the STM-16 optical signal to fibers for transmission.
3 SDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Logic Control Module
This module generates the timing clock signal and frame header for the board, controls the ALS
function, and passes through the orderwire and ECC bytes between the two optical interface
boards that form an ADM.
Power Unit
This unit provides DC power for all the modules of the board.
3.1.4 Front Panel
The OI16D does not have an independent front panel because it is integrated with the SCB.
3.1.5 Feature Code
The OI16D does not have an independent feature code because it is integrated with the SCB.
3.1.6 Valid Slots
The OI16D does not have an independent slot because it is integrated with the SCB.
You can set the parameters for the OI16D by using the T2000.
Set the parameters for the OI16D on the T2000 before using it. The parameters that need to be
set for the OI16D are as follows:
l J0
l J1
l C2
For the description of each parameter, see 13.1 SDH Boards.
The OI16D is integrated with the SCB. This topic provides the parameters specified for the
optical interfaces of the OI16D. For the other technical specifications of the OI16D, see the topic
that describes the technical specifications of the SCB.
Table 3-2 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the OI16D.
Table 3-2 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the OI16D
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 2488.32 Mbit/s
Line code pattern NRZ
3-5
Parameter Value
Connector LC
Type of optical
interface
S-16.1
Central wavelength
(nm)
1310
Maximum
transmission distance
(km)
15
Launched optical
power (dBm)
-5 to 0
Receiver sensitivity
(dBm)
-21
Minimum overload
(dBm)
0

NOTE
The receive optical power in an actual environment should be the receiver sensitivity plus 3 dB.
3.2 OI4/OI4D
technical specifications of the OI4/OI4D.
The OI4 is available in four functional versions, namely, SS42, SS44, SS48, and SS49. The
OI4D is available in two functional versions, namely, SS48 and SS49.The OI4 is available in
two functional versions, namely, SS45 and SS48. The OI4D is available in one functional
version, namely, SS48.
The OI4/OI4D transmits and receives STM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the
line.
The OI4/OI4D consists of the O/E converting module, data and clock restoration module, SDH
3.2.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the OI4/OI4D has an indicator, an interface, a bar code, and a laser safety
class label.
3.2.5 Valid Slots
The OI4 can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3. The OI4D can be installed in slot IU1, IU2,
IU3, or integrated with the SCB.
3 SDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
3.2.6 Feature Code
You can set the parameters for the OI4/OI4D by using the T2000.
The technical specifications of the OI4/OI4D include the parameters specified for optical
interfaces, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
The OI4 is available in four functional versions, namely, SS42, SS44, SS48, and SS49. The
OI4D is available in two functional versions, namely, SS48 and SS49.The OI4 is available in
two functional versions, namely, SS45 and SS48. The OI4D is available in one functional
version, namely, SS48.
Table 3-3Table 3-4 describes the versions of the OI4.
Table 3-3 Versions of the OI4
Item Description
Functional versions SS42
SS44
SS48
SS49
Differences l The SS42OI4 and SS44OI4 use the SC optical interface
and support the optical interfaces of the Ie-4, S-4.1, L-4.1,
and L-4.2 types.
l The SS48OI4 and SS49OI4 use the SFP optical interface
and supports the optical interfaces of the S-4.1, L-4.1, and
L-4.2 types.
Substitution The boards that have the optical interfaces of the same type
can be substituted with each other.

Table 3-4 Versions of the OI4
Item Description
SS48
3-7
Item Description
Differences l The SS45OI4 uses the SC optical interface and supports
the optical interfaces of the Ie-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2
types.
l The SS48OI4 uses the SFP optical interface and supports
the optical interfaces of the S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 types.

Table 3-5 describes the versions of the OI4D.
Table 3-5 Versions of the OI4D
Item Description
SS49
Differences l The SS48OI4D uses the SFP/SC optical interface and
supports the optical interfaces of the Ie-4.1, S-4.1, L-4.1,
and L-4.2 types.
l The SS49OI4D uses the SFP optical interface and supports

The OI4/OI4D transmits and receives STM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for the
line.
The OI4 is a 1xSTM-4 optical interface board.
The OI4D is a 2xSTM-4 optical interface board. The OI4D is available in two types: pluggable
OI4D and integrated OI4D. The pluggable OI4D can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3. The
integrated OI4D is integrated with the SCB. The optical port of the OI4D can be equipped with
an SC connector or an SFP optical module. You can select an SC connector or an SFP optical
module depending on requirements. When an SFP optical module is used, the maintenance of
the optical module is convenient.
Table 3-6 provides the functions and features of the OI4/OI4D.
3 SDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 3-6 Functions and features of the OI4/OI4D
Function and
Feature
OI4 OI4D
Basic functions Transmits and receives 1xSTM-4
optical signals.
Transmits and receives 2xSTM-4
optical signals.
Specifications
of the optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ie-4,
S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply
with ITU-T G.957.
Specifications
of the optical
module
Provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function (the 42OI4 does
not provide the ALS function). The optical interface supports the function
of setting the on/off state of a laser.
Service
processing
Time
synchronization
function
Supports the high-precision time synchronization function to realize the
Overhead
processing
l Provides the transparent data communication channel (DCC) and
orderwire byte channel.
Pointer
processing
Alarms and
performance
events
Protection
modes
l Supports the multiplex section protection (MSP) in slots IU1, IU2, and
IU5.
l Supports the sub-network connection protection (SNCP).
Maintenance
features
quickly.
l Supports the setting of the enabled state of the synchronization status
message (SSM) on the line optical interface.
degrade thresholds.
3-9

The OI4/OI4D consists of the O/E converting module, data and clock restoration module, SDH
Figure 3-2 shows the functional block diagram of the OI4/OI4D.
Figure 3-2 Functional block diagram of the OI4/OI4D
Data and clock
restoration
module
SDH
overhead
processing
module
Logic control
module
STM-4
STM-4
Cross-connect
unit
O/E
conversion
E/O
SCC unit
5 V
Fuse
5 V
unit
Backplane

Receive Direction
extracts the overhead bytes from the received STM-4 signal and sends the payload signal to the
cross-connect unit through the backplane. The R_LOF alarm signal, R_OOF alarm signal, and
other alarm signals are detected in the SDH overhead processing module.
Transmit Direction
3 SDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Power Unit
3.2.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the OI4/OI4D has an indicator, an interface, a bar code, and a laser safety
class label.
Diagram of the Front Panel
Figure 3-3Figure 3-4 shows the front panel of the OI4/OI4D by considering the SC optical
interface as an example.
Figure 3-3 Front panel of the OI4/OI4D
OI4
LOS
OI4
Indicator
Optical interface
OI4D
LOS LOS
OI4D
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
Optical module label

3-11
Figure 3-4 Front panel of the OI4/OI4D
OI4
LOS
OI4
Indicator
Optical interface
OI4D
LOS LOS
OI4D
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT

Indicators
The front panel of the OI4/OI4D has an alarm indicator. Table 3-7 provides the meanings of the
statuses of the indicator.
Table 3-7 Indicator on the front panel of the OI4/OI4D
Indicator Status Meaning
LOS (red) Off The board normally receives optical
signals.
On The board does not receive optical
signals, or the optical power is very
low.

Interfaces
The SC/LC optical interface on the front panel of the OI4/OI4D is used to transmit and receive
STM-4 optical signals.
3.2.5 Valid Slots
The OI4 can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3. The OI4D can be installed in slot IU1, IU2,
IU3, or integrated with the SCB.
3.2.6 Feature Code
Table 3-8Table 3-9 provides the relationship between the feature code of the OI4 and the type
of optical interface.
3 SDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 3-8 Relationship between the feature code of the OI4 and the type of optical interface
Board Feature Code Type of Optical Interface
SS42OI4A01 A01 Ie-4, SC
SS42OI4A02 A02 S-4.1, SC
SS42OI4A03 A03 L-4.1, SC
SS42OI4A04 A04 L-4.2, SC
SS44OI4A02 A02 S-4.1, SC
SS44OI4A03 A03 L-4.1, SC
SS44OI4A04 A04 L-4.2, SC
SS48OI402 02 S-4.1, LC
SS48OI403 03 L-4.1, LC
SS48OI404 04 L-4.2, LC
SS49OI402 02 S-4.1, LC
SS49OI403 03 L-4.1, LC
SS49OI404 04 L-4.2, LC

Table 3-9 Relationship between the feature code of the OI4 and the type of optical interface
SS45OI4A02 A02 S-4.1, SC
SS45OI4A03 A03 L-4.1, SC
SS45OI4A04 A04 L-4.2, SC
SS48OI4E02 E02 S-4.1, LC
SS48OI4E03 E03 L-4.1, LC
SS48OI4E04 E04 L-4.2, LC

Table 3-10Table 3-11 provides the relationship between the feature code of the OI4D and the
type of optical interface.
3-13
Table 3-10 Relationship between the feature code of the OI4D and the type of optical interface
SS48OI4D02 02 S-4.1, LC
SS48OI4D03 03 L-4.1, LC
SS48OI4D04 04 L-4.2, LC
SS48OI4DA01 A01 S-4.1, SC
SS48OI4DA02 A02 Ie-4, SC
SS48OI4DA03 A03 L-4.1, SC
SS48OI4DA04 A04 L-4.2, SC
SS49OI4D02 02 S-4.1, LC
SS49OI4D03 03 L-4.1, LC
SS49OI4D04 04 L-4.2, LC

SS48OI4DE02 E02 S-4.1, LC
SS48OI4DE03 E03 L-4.1, LC
SS48OI4DEA01 EA01 S-4.1, SC
SS48OI4DEA02 EA02 Ie-4, SC
SS48OI4DEA03 EA03 L-4.1, SC
SS48OI4DEA04 EA04 L-4.2, SC

You can set the parameters for the OI4/OI4D by using the T2000.
Set the parameters for the OI4/OI4D on the T2000 before using it. The parameters that need to
be set for the OI4/OI4D are as follows:
l J0
l J1
l C2
3 SDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
The technical specifications of the OI4/OI4D include the parameters specified for optical
Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces
Table 3-12 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the OI4/OI4D.
Table 3-12 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the OI4/OI4D
Parameter Value
Connector SC/LC
Type of optical
interface
Ie-4 S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2
Central
wavelength (nm)
1310 1310 1310 1550
Maximum
transmission
distance (km)
0.5 15 40 80
Launched optical
power (dBm)
-20 to -14 -15 to -8 -3 to +2 -3 to +2
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-23 -28 -30 -28
Minimum
overload (dBm)
0 -8 -8 -8

Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the OI4 are as follows:
l Dimensions (width x depth x height): 89.0 mm x 218.5 mm x 24.0 mm
l Weight: 0.20 kg
The mechanical specifications of the OI4D are as follows:
l Weight: 0.25 kg
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption of the OI4 at room temperature (25C) is 9 W.
3-15
l The maximum power consumption of the OI4D at room temperature (25C) is 11 W.
3.3 OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O
technical specifications of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O.
The OI2S/OI2D is available in three functional versions, namely, SS42, SS48, and SS49. The
SL1Q/SL1O is available in one functional version, namely, SS42.The OI2S/OI2D is available
in two functional versions, namely, SS45 and SS48. The SL1Q/SL1O is available in one
functional version, namely, SS45.
The OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O transmits and receives STM-1 optical signals, performs O/E
conversion for the STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and generates
alarm signals on the line.
The OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O consists of the O/E converting module, data and clock restoration
module, SDH overhead processing module, logic control module, and power unit.
3.3.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser
safety class label.
3.3.5 Valid Slots
The OI2S/OI2D can be installed in slot IU1, IU2 or IU3. The SL1Q/SL1O can be installed in
IU4. The OI2D can be installed in a slot or integrated with the SCB.
3.3.6 Feature Code
You can set the parameters for the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O by using the T2000.
The technical specifications of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O include the parameters specified
for optical interfaces, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
The OI2S/OI2D is available in three functional versions, namely, SS42, SS48, and SS49. The
SL1Q/SL1O is available in one functional version, namely, SS42.The OI2S/OI2D is available
in two functional versions, namely, SS45 and SS48. The SL1Q/SL1O is available in one
Table 3-13Table 3-14 describes the versions of the OI2S.
Table 3-13 Versions of the OI2S
Item Description
3 SDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Item Description
SS48
SS49
Differences l The SS42OI2S uses the SC optical interface and supports
types.
l The SS48OI2S and SS49OI2S use the SFP optical interface
and supports the optical interfaces of the S-1.1, L-1.1, and
L-1.2 types.

Table 3-14 Versions of the OI2S
Item Description
SS48
Differences l The SS45OI2S uses the SC optical interface and supports
types.
l The SS48OI2S uses the SFP optical interface and supports

Table 3-15Table 3-16 describes the versions of the OI2D.
Item Description
SS48
SS49
Differences l The SS42OI2D uses the SC optical interface and supports
types.
l The SS48OI2D and SS49OI2D use the SFP optical
interface and supports the optical interfaces of the S-1.1,
L-1.1, and L-1.2 types.
3-17
Item Description

Item Description
SS48
Differences l The SS45OI2D uses the SC optical interface and supports
types.
l The SS48OI2D uses the SFP optical interface and supports

The OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O transmits and receives STM-1 optical signals, performs O/E
conversion for the STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and generates
l The OI2S is a 1xSTM-1 optical interface board.
l The OI2D is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board. The OI2D can be installed in a slot or
integrated with the SCB.
l The SL1Q is a 4xSTM-1 optical interface board.
l The SL1O is an 8xSTM-1 optical interface board.
Table 3-17 provides the functions and features of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O.
Table 3-17 Functions and features of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O
Function and
Feature
OI2S OI2D SL1Q SL1O
Basic functions Transmits and
receives
1xSTM-1
optical signals.
Transmits and
receives
2xSTM-1
optical signals.
Transmits and
receives
4xSTM-1
optical signals.
Transmits and
receives
8xSTM-1
optical signals.
Specifications of
the optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ie-1,
S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2. The characteristics of the optical interfaces
comply with ITU-T G.957.
3 SDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Function and
Feature
OI2S OI2D SL1Q SL1O
Specifications of
the optical
module
Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the function
of setting the on/off state of a laser.
Supports the query of the optical power.
Service
processing
Time
synchronization
function
Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time
synchronization function to realize
the synchronization of time over
the entire network.
Does not support the time
synchronization function.
Overhead
processing
l Provides the transparent DCC and orderwire byte channel.
l Supports the setting and query of the J0/J1/C2 byte.
Pointer
processing
Alarms and
performance
events
Protection modes l The OI2S/OI2D supports the linear MSP and SNCP.
l The SL1Q/SL1O does not support the MSP, but supports the SNCP.
Maintenance
features
quickly.
l Supports the setting of the enabled state of the SSM on the line optical
interface.
degrade thresholds.

The OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O consists of the O/E converting module, data and clock restoration
Figure 3-5 shows the functional block diagram of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O.
3-19
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O
Data and clock
restoration
module
SDH
overhead
processing
module
Logic control
module
STM-1
STM-1
Cross-connect
unit
O/E
conversion
E/O
SCC unit
5 V
Fuse
5 V
unit
Backplane

Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
Power Unit
3 SDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
3.3.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser
safety class label.
Figure 3-6Figure 3-7 shows the front panel of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O by considering the
SC optical interface as an example.
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O
OI2S
OI2D
Optical interface Indicator
SL1Q
SL1Q
LOS
LOS
2
LOS
LOS
4 3
SL1O
SL1O
LOS
LOS
2
LOS
LOS
4 3
LOS
LOS
6 5
LOS
LOS
8 7

3-21
Figure 3-7 Front panel of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O
OI2S
OI2D
SL1Q
SL1Q
LOS
LOS
2
LOS
LOS
4 3
SL1O
SL1O
LOS
LOS
2
LOS
LOS
4 3
LOS
LOS
6 5
LOS
LOS
8 7

Indicators
The front panel of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O has an alarm indicator. Table 3-18 provides the
meanings of the statuses of the indicator.
Table 3-18 Indicator on the front panel of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O
signals.
low.

Interfaces
The SC/LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O are used to
transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals.
3 SDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
3.3.5 Valid Slots
The OI2S/OI2D can be installed in slot IU1, IU2 or IU3. The SL1Q/SL1O can be installed in
IU4. The OI2D can be installed in a slot or integrated with the SCB.
3.3.6 Feature Code
Table 3-19Table 3-20 provides the relationship between the feature code of the OI2S and the
Table 3-19 Relationship between the feature code of the OI2S and the type of optical interface
SS42OI2S01 01 S-1.1, SC
SS42OI2S02 02 Ie-1, SC
SS42OI2S03 03 L-1.1, SC
SS42OI2S04 04 L-1.2, SC
SS48OI2S02 02 S-1.1, LC
SS48OI2S03 03 L-1.1, LC
SS48OI2S04 04 L-1.2, LC
SS49OI2S02 02 S-1.1, LC
SS49OI2S03 03 L-1.1, LC
SS49OI2S04 04 L-1.2, LC

Table 3-20 Relationship between the feature code of the OI2S and the type of optical interface
SS45OI2S01 01 S-1.1, SC
SS45OI2S02 02 Ie-1, SC
SS45OI2S03 03 L-1.1, SC
SS45OI2S04 04 L-1.2, SC
SS48OI2SE02 E02 S-1.1, LC
SS48OI2SE03 E03 L-1.1, LC
SS48OI2SE04 E04 L-1.2, LC

3-23
Table 3-21Table 3-22 provides the relationship between the feature code of the OI2D and the
SS42OI2D01 01 S-1.1, SC
SS42OI2D02 02 L-1.1, SC
SS42OI2D03 03 L-1.2, SC
SS42OI2D04 04 Ie-1/L-1.1, SC
SS42OI2D05 05 Ie-1/L-1.2, SC
SS42OI2D06 06 L-1.1/L-1.2, SC
SS42OI2D07 07 L-1.1/Ie-1, SC
SS42OI2D08 08 L-1.2/Ie-1, SC
SS42OI2D09 09 L-1.2/L-1.1, SC
SS42OI2D10 10 Ie-1, SC
SS48OI2D02 02 S-1.1, LC
SS48OI2D03 03 L-1.1, LC
SS48OI2D04 04 L-1.2, LC
SS49OI2D02 02 S-1.1, LC
SS49OI2D03 03 L-1.1, LC
SS49OI2D04 04 L-1.2, LC

SS45OI2D01 01 S-1.1, SC
SS45OI2D02 02 L-1.1, SC
SS45OI2D03 03 L-1.2, SC
SS45OI2D04 04 Ie-1, SC
SS48OI2DE02 E02 S-1.1, LC

3 SDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 3-23Table 3-24 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SL1Q and the
Table 3-23 Relationship between the feature code of the SL1Q and the type of optical interface
SS42SL1Q01 01 Ie-1, SC
SS42SL1Q02 02 S-1.1, SC
SS42SL1Q03 03 L-1.1, SC
SS42SL1Q04 04 L-1.2, SC

Table 3-24 Relationship between the feature code of the SL1Q and the type of optical interface
SS45SL1Q01 01 Ie-1, SC
SS45SL1Q02 02 S-1.1, SC
SS45SL1Q03 03 L-1.1, SC
SS45SL1Q04 04 L-1.2, SC

Table 3-25Table 3-26 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SL1O and the
Table 3-25 Relationship between the feature code of the SL1O and the type of optical interface
SS42SL1O01 01 Ie-1, SC
SS42SL1O02 02 S-1.1, SC
SS42SL1O03 03 L-1.1, SC
SS42SL1O04 04 L-1.2, SC

Table 3-26 Relationship between the feature code of the SL1O and the type of optical interface
SS45SL1O01 01 Ie-1, SC
SS45SL1O02 02 S-1.1, SC
SS45SL1O03 03 L-1.1, SC
3-25
SS45SL1O04 04 L-1.2, SC

You can set the parameters for the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O by using the T2000.
Set the parameters for the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O on the T2000 before using it. The parameters
that need to be set for the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O are as follows:
l J0
l J1
l C2
The technical specifications of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O include the parameters specified
for optical interfaces, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 3-27 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/
SL1O.
Table 3-27 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the OI2S/OI2D/SL1Q/SL1O
Parameter Value
Connector SC/LC
Type of optical
interface
Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2
Central
wavelength (nm)
1310 1310 1310 1550
Maximum
transmission
distance (km)
2 15 40 80
Launched optical
power (dBm)
-15 to -8 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-23 -28 -34 -34
3 SDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Parameter Value
Minimum
overload (dBm)
-8 -8 -10 -10

The mechanical specifications of the OI2S are as follows:
l Weight: 0.21 kg
The mechanical specifications of the OI2D are as follows:
l Weight: 0.22 kg
The mechanical specifications of the SL1Q are as follows:
l Weight: 0.60 kg
The mechanical specifications of the SL1O are as follows:
l Weight: 0.66 kg
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption of the OI2S at room temperature (25C) is 10 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the OI2D at room temperature (25C) is 10 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the SL1Q at room temperature (25C) is 9 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the SL1O at room temperature (25C) is 14 W.
3.4 SB2D/SB2R/SB2L
technical specifications of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L.
The SB2D is available in two functional versions, namely, SS42 and SS49. The SB2R/SB2L is
available in one functional version, namely, SS42. The SB2D/SB2R/SB2L is available in one
The SB2D/SB2R/SB2L transmits and receives STM-1 optical signals on a single fiber, performs
O/E conversion for the STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and generates
3-27
The SB2D/SB2R/SB2L consists of the O/E converting module, data and clock restoration
3.4.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L has an indicator, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser
safety class label.
3.4.5 Valid Slots
The SB2D/SB2L/SB2R can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3.
3.4.6 Feature Code
You can set the parameters for the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L by using the T2000.
The technical specifications of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L include the parameters specified for
optical interfaces, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
The SB2D is available in two functional versions, namely, SS42 and SS49. The SB2R/SB2L is
available in one functional version, namely, SS42. The SB2D/SB2R/SB2L is available in one
The SS42SB2D uses the SC optical module, and the SS49SB2D uses the SFP optical interface.
The SS42SB2D and SS49SB2D support the optical interfaces of the S-1.1 and L-1.1 types.
The SB2D/SB2R/SB2L transmits and receives STM-1 optical signals on a single fiber, performs
O/E conversion for the STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and generates
l The SB2D is a 2xSTM-1 single-fiber bidirectional optical interface board. In the case of
the left optical interface, signals are transmitted on the 1550 nm wavelength and received
on the 1310 nm wavelength. In the case of the right optical interface, signals are transmitted
on the 1310 nm wavelength and received on the 1550 nm wavelength.
l The SB2R is a 1xSTM-1 single-fiber bidirectional optical interface board. It has only one
optical interface, which is on the right. Signals are transmitted on the 1310 nm wavelength
and received on the 1550 nm wavelength.
l The SB2L is a 1xSTM-1 single-fiber bidirectional optical interface board. It has only one
optical interface, which is on the right. Signals are transmitted on the 1550 nm wavelength
and received on the 1310 nm wavelength.
NOTE
The SB2R and SB2L must be used together.
Table 3-28 provides the functions and features of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L.
3 SDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 3-28 Functions and features of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L
Function and
Feature
SB2D SB2R SB2L
Basic functions Transmits and receives
2xSTM-1 optical
signals.
Transmits and
receives 1xSTM-1
optical signals.
Transmits and receives
1xSTM-1 optical
signals.
Specifications of
the optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the S-1.1
and L-1.1. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-
T G.957.
Specifications of
the optical
module
Uses the SC optical module.
Provides the ALS function.
The optical interface supports the function of setting the on/off state of a
laser.
Service
processing
Overhead
processing
Pointer
processing
Alarms and
performance
events
Protection
modes
Supports the SNCP.
Maintenance
features
quickly.
l Supports the setting of the enabled state of the SSM on the line optical
interface.
degrade thresholds.
l Provides the optical interface that supports the transmitting and
receiving of signals on a single fiber to save optical fibers.

3-29
The SB2D/SB2R/SB2L consists of the O/E converting module, data and clock restoration
Figure 3-8 shows the functional block diagram of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L.
Figure 3-8 Functional block diagram of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L
Data and clock
restoration
module
SDH
overhead
processing
module
Logic control
module
STM-1
Cross-connect
unit
O/E
conversion
E/O
SCC unit
5 V
Fuse
5 V
Cross-connect
unit
conversion
Backplane

Receive Direction
Transmit Direction
3 SDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Power Unit
3.4.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L has an indicator, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser
safety class label.
Figure 3-9 shows the front panel of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L by considering the SC optical
Figure 3-9 Front panel of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L
SB2D
SB2R
SB2D
IO1 IO2
SB2R
IO
SB2L
SB2L
IO
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
Indicator Optical interface Optical module label

Indicators
The front panel of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L has an alarm indicator. Table 3-29 provides the
meanings of the statuses of the indicator.
Table 3-29 Indicator on the front panel of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L
signals.
3-31
low.

Interfaces
The transceiving SC/FC optical interface on the front panel of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L is used to
transmit and receive STM-1 optical signals.
3.4.5 Valid Slots
The SB2D/SB2L/SB2R can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3.
3.4.6 Feature Code
Table 3-30 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SB2D and the type of
optical interface.
Table 3-30 Relationship between the feature code of the SB2D and the type of optical interface
SS42SB2D01 01 S-1.1, FC
SS42SB2DB01 B01 S-1.1, SC
SS42SB2DB02 B02 L-1.1, SC
SS49SB2DB01 B01 S-1.1, LC
SS49SB2DB02 B02 L-1.1, LC

Table 3-31 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SB2R and the type of optical
interface.
Table 3-31 Relationship between the feature code of the SB2R and the type of optical interface
SS42SB2R01 01 S-1.1, FC
SS42SB2RB01 B01 S-1.1, SC
SS42SB2RB02 B02 L-1.1, SC

3 SDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 3-32 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SB2L and the type of optical
interface.
Table 3-32 Relationship between the feature code of the SB2L and the type of optical interface
SS42SB2L01 01 S-1.1, FC
SS42SB2LB01 B01 S-1.1, SC
SS42SB2LB02 B02 L-1.1, SC

You can set the parameters for the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L by using the T2000.
Set the parameters for the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L on the T2000 before using it. The parameters that
need to be set for the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L are as follows:
l J0
l J1
l C2
The technical specifications of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L include the parameters specified for
optical interfaces, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 3-33 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L.
Table 3-33 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L
Parameter Value
Connector SC
Type of optical
interface
S-1.1 L-1.1
Central
wavelength (nm)
1310/1550 1310/1550
3-33
Parameter Value
Maximum
transmission
distance (km)
15 60
Launched optical
power (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-28 -34

The mechanical specifications of the SB2D/SB2R/SB2L are as follows:
l Weight: 0.20 kg
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption of the SB2D at room temperature (25C) is 11 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the SB2R/SB2L at room temperature (25C) is 7 W.
3.5 SLE/SDE
technical specifications of the SLE/SDE.
The SLE/SDE is available in one functional version, namely, SS42.The SLE/SDE is available
in one functional version, namely, SS45.
The SLE/SDE transmits and receives STM-1 electrical signals, extracts and inserts overhead
bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.
The SLE/SDE consists of the interface module, frame synchronization and scrambling module,
3.5.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the SLE/SDE has an indicator, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.
3.5.5 Valid Slots
The SLE/SDE can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3.
You can set the parameters for the SLE/SDE by using the T2000.
The technical specifications of the SLE/SDE include the parameters specified for electrical
3 SDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
The SLE/SDE is available in one functional version, namely, SS42.The SLE/SDE is available
in one functional version, namely, SS45.
The SLE/SDE transmits and receives STM-1 electrical signals, extracts and inserts overhead
bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.
Table 3-34 provides the functions and features of the SLE/SDE.
Table 3-34 Functions and features of the SLE/SDE
Function and
Feature
SLE SDE
Basic functions Transmits and receives
1xSTM-1 electrical signals.
Transmits and receives 2xSTM-1
electrical signals.
Service
processing
The SLE/SDE transmits and receives STM-1 electrical signals, extracts
and inserts overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.
Overhead
processing
l Processes the section overheads of STM-1 signals. The overhead bytes
include the B1 byte, B2 byte, K1 byte, K2 byte, M1 byte, F1 byte, and
D1-D12 bytes.
l Processes path overheads (transparent transmission and termination).
The overhead bytes include the J1 byte, B3 byte, C2 byte, G1 byte, and
H4 byte.
Alarms and
performance
events
Protection
modes
Supports the SNCP.
Maintenance
features
Supports inloop and outloop at ports.

The SLE/SDE consists of the interface module, frame synchronization and scrambling module,
Figure 3-10 shows the functional block diagram of the SLE/SDE.
3-35
Figure 3-10 Functional block diagram of the SLE/SDE
Frame
synchronization
and scrambling
module
Overhead
processing
Logic control
module
STM-1
STM-1
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
Interface
module
5 V
Fuse
5 V
Cross-connect
unit
module
Backplane

Receive Direction
The interface module accesses an STM-1 electrical signal from the coaxial interface and sends
the STM-1 electrical signal to the frame synchronization and scrambling module. The interface
module can detect the R_LOS alarm signal.
The frame synchronization and scrambling module descrambles the STM-1 electrical signal,
converts the STM-1 electrical signal into a parallel signal, and sends the parallel signal to the
overhead processing module. The R_LOF alarm signal and R_OOF alarm signal are detected
in the frame synchronization and scrambling module.
The overhead processing module extracts the overhead bytes from the received STM-1 signal
and demultiplexes the signal into a VC-4 signal.
Transmit Direction
The overhead processing module multiplexes the VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit into
an STM-1 signal, inserts the overhead bytes into the STM-1 signal, and sends the STM-1 signal
to the frame synchronization and scrambling module.
The frame synchronization and scrambling module converts the STM-1 electrical signal into a
serial signal, scrambles the serial signal, and sends the serial signal to the interface module.
This module generates the timing clock signal and frame header for the board, and passes through
the orderwire and ECC bytes between the two interface boards that form an ADM.
3 SDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Power Unit
3.5.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the SLE/SDE has an indicator, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.
Figure 3-11Figure 3-12 shows the front panel of the SLE/SDE.
Figure 3-11 Front panel of the SLE/SDE
SDE
SDE
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2
SLE
SLE
Indicator
TX1 RX1
SMB electrical
interface-Tx
SMB electrical
interface-Rx

Figure 3-12 Front panel of the SLE/SDE
SDE
SDE
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2
SLE
SLE
Indicator
TX1 RX1
SMB electrical
interface-Tx
SMB electrical
interface-Rx

3-37
Indicators
The front panel of the SLE/SDE has an alarm indicator. Table 3-35 provides the meanings of
the statuses of the indicator.
Table 3-35 Indicator on the front panel of the SLE/SDE
LOS (red) Off The board normally receives STM-1
electrical signals.
On The board does not receive STM-1
electrical signals.

Interfaces
The front panel of the SLE/SDE has the STM-1 electrical interfaces. The electrical interfaces
are SMB coaxial connectors. The digit on an interface indicates the sequence number of the
interface. Tx indicates the transmit end and Rx indicates the receive end.
3.5.5 Valid Slots
The SLE/SDE can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3.
You can set the parameters for the SLE/SDE by using the T2000.
Set the parameters for the SLE/SDE on the T2000 before using it. The parameters that need to
be set for the SLE/SDE are as follows:
l J0
l J1
l C2
The technical specifications of the SLE/SDE include the parameters specified for electrical
Parameters Specified for Electrical Interfaces
Table 3-36 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the SLE/SDE.
Table 3-36 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the SLE/SDE
Parameter Value
3 SDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Parameter Value
Line code pattern CMI
Connector 75-ohm SMB coaxial connector

The mechanical specifications of the SLE are as follows:
l Weight: 0.21 kg
The mechanical specifications of the SDE are as follows:
l Weight: 0.22 kg
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption of the SLE at room temperature (25C) is 9 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the SDE at room temperature (25C) is 10 W.
3-39
4 PDH Boards
About This Chapter
This topic describes the PDH boards at the E1, E1/T1, and E3/T3 levels.
4.1 SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2TSP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T
technical specifications of the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T.This topic describes the
version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the
SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T.
4.2 SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T
technical specifications of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T.
4.3 PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T
technical specifications of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T.
Hardware Description 4 PDH Boards
4-1
4.1 SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2TSP1D/SP2D/
PD2S/PD2D/PD2T
technical specifications of the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T.This topic describes the
version, functions, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications of the
SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T.
The SP2D is available in one functional version, namely, SS42. The SP1S/SP1D/PD2S/PD2D/
PD2T is available in two functional versions, namely, SS42 and SS44.The SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/
PD2D/PD2T is available in one functional version, namely, SS45.
The SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T transmits and receives E1 electrical signals,
processes VC-12 path overheads, and generates alarm signals on the tributary.The SP1D/SP2D/
PD2S/PD2D/PD2T transmits and receives E1 electrical signals, processes VC-12 path
overheads, and generates alarm signals on the tributary.
The SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T consists of the interface module, coding/decoding
module, mapping/demapping module, logic control module, and power module.
4.1.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T has interfaces, a bar code, and a
laser safety class label.
4.1.5 Valid Slots
The SP1S/SP1D can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3. The PD2S/PD2D/PD2T can be
installed in slot IU4. The SP2D can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, IU3, or integrated with the
SCB.
You can set the parameters for the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T by using the T2000.
The technical specifications of the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T include the
parameters specified for electrical interfaces, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
The SP2D is available in one functional version, namely, SS42. The SP1S/SP1D/PD2S/PD2D/
PD2T is available in two functional versions, namely, SS42 and SS44.The SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/
PD2D/PD2T is available in one functional version, namely, SS45.
Table 4-1 describes the versions of the SP1S.
Table 4-1 Versions of the SP1S
Item Description
4 PDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Item Description
SS44
Differences l The interface impedance of the SS42SP1S can be set by
using the jumpers on the board.
l The SS44SP1S is available in two types, namely,
SS44SP1SA (75-ohm) and SS44SP1SB (120-ohm).
Substitution The boards that are set to the same impedance can be
substituted with each other.

Table 4-2 describes the versions of the SP1D.
Table 4-2 Versions of the SP1D
Item Description
SS44
Differences l The interface impedance of the SS42SP1D can be set by
using the jumpers on the board.
l The SS44SP1D is available in two types, namely,
SS44SP1DA (75-ohm) and SS44SP1DB (120-ohm).

Table 4-3 describes the versions of the PD2S.
Table 4-3 Versions of the PD2S
Item Description
SS44
Differences None

Table 4-4 describes the versions of the PD2D.
4-3
Table 4-4 Versions of the PD2D
Item Description
SS44
Differences None

Table 4-5 describes the versions of the PD2T.
Table 4-5 Versions of the PD2T
Item Description
SS44
Differences None

The SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T transmits and receives E1 electrical signals,
processes VC-12 path overheads, and generates alarm signals on the tributary.The SP1D/SP2D/
PD2S/PD2D/PD2T transmits and receives E1 electrical signals, processes VC-12 path
overheads, and generates alarm signals on the tributary.
The SP1S is a 4xE1 electrical interface board. The SP1D is an 8xE1 electrical interface board.
The SP2D is a 16xE1 electrical interface board. The PD2S is a 16xE1 electrical interface board.
The PD2D is a 32xE1 electrical interface board. The PD2T is a 48xE1 electrical interface board.
The SP1D is an 8xE1 electrical interface board. The SP2D is a 16xE1 electrical interface board.
The PD2S is a 16xE1 electrical interface board. The PD2D is a 32xE1 electrical interface board.
The PD2T is a 48xE1 electrical interface board.
Table 4-6 provides the functions and features of the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T.
Table 4-7 provides the functions and features of the SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T.
4 PDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 4-6 Functions and features of the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T
Function and
Feature
SP1S SP1D SP2D PD2S PD2
D
PD2T
Basic functions l The SP1S processes 4xE1 signals.
l The SP1D processes 8xE1 signals.
l The PD2S processes 16xE1 signals.
l The PD2D processes 32xE1 signals.
l The PD2T processes 48xE1 signals.
Mapping
processing
Realizes the mapping and demapping between the E1 and
the VC-4.
Overhead
processing
Processes the path overheads at the VC-12 level.
Supports the setting and query of overhead bytes such as
the J2 and V5.
Alarms and
performance
events
Provides rich alarms and performance events, thus
facilitating the management and maintenance of the
equipment.
Supports the alarm reversion function.
Clock source The SP1S provides one reference clock source.
The SP1D/SP2D/PD2S provides two reference clock
sources.
The PD2D provides four reference clock sources.
The PD2T provides six reference clock sources.
Protection
modes
Supports the SNCP, with a switching time of less than 50
ms.
Maintenance
features
l Supports inloop and outloop so that faults can be
located quickly.
l Supports the setting of the overhead byte to be sent/
received, thus enabling the board to function as an
overhead instrument.
l Supports the setting of the bit error threshold-crossing
values and degrade thresholds.
l Supports the BER test.
l Supports the timeslot allocation.
l Supports the setting of inserting BIP2 errors.
l Supports the lower-order pseudo random binary
sequence (PRBS) function towards the tributary
direction and cross-connect direction.
Other functions The impedance of the tributary port on the SP2D/PD2S/
PD2D/PD2T can be set to 120 ohms or 75 ohms.
4-5

Table 4-7 Functions and features of the SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T
Function and
Feature
SP1D SP2D PD2S PD2D PD2T
Basic functions l The SP1D processes 8xE1 signals.
l The PD2S processes 16xE1 signals.
l The PD2D processes 32xE1 signals.
l The PD2T processes 48xE1 signals.
Mapping
processing
Realizes the mapping and demapping between the
E1 and the VC-4.
Overhead
processing
Supports the setting and query of overhead bytes
such as the J2 and V5.
Alarms and
performance
events
Provides rich alarms and performance events, thus
facilitating the management and maintenance of
the equipment.
Clock source The SP1D/SP2D/PD2S provides two reference
clock sources. The PD2D provides four reference
clock sources. The PD2T provides six reference
clock sources.
Protection
modes
Supports the SNCP, with a switching time of less
than 50 ms.
Maintenance
features
l Supports inloop and outloop so that faults can
be located quickly.
l Supports the setting of the overhead byte to be
sent/received, thus enabling the board to
function as an overhead instrument.
l Supports the setting of the bit error threshold-
crossing values and degrade thresholds.
l Supports the lower-order pseudo random
binary sequence (PRBS) function towards the
tributary direction and cross-connect direction.
Other functions The impedance of the tributary port on the SP2D/
PD2S/PD2D/PD2T can be set to 120 ohms or 75
ohms.

4 PDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
The SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T consists of the interface module, coding/decoding
module, mapping/demapping module, logic control module, and power module.
Figure 4-1 shows the functional block diagram of the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T.
Figure 4-1 Functional block diagram of the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
Decoding
module
Coding
module
Interface
module
E1
E1
Mapping
module
Demapping
module
Logic control
module
5 V
Fuse
5 V
Cross-connect
unit
Backplane

Receive Direction
The interface module accesses an E1 signal and sends the E1 signal to the decoding module.
The decoding module decodes the E1 signal to restore the HDB3 data signal and clock signal,
and sends the signals to the mapping module.
The mapping module asynchronously maps the E1 signal into a C-12 signal, adds the path
overhead to the C-12 signal to form a VC-12 signal, adds the pointer to the VC-12 signal to form
a TU-12 signal, multiplexes the TU-12 signal to form a VC-4 signal, and finally sends the VC-4
signal to the cross-connect unit.
Transmit Direction
The demapping module demaps the VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit, extracts the binary
data and clock signal from the VC-4 signal, and sends the binary data and clock signal to the
coding module. The coding module codes the signals and outputs the E1 signal through the
interface module.
This module communicates with the SCB. This module reports the board information, alarms,
and performance events to the SCB, and receives the configuration command issued from the
SCB.
4-7
Power Unit
4.1.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T has interfaces, a bar code, and a
laser safety class label.
Figure 4-2Figure 4-3 shows the front panel of the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T.
Figure 4-2 Front panel of the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T
SP1S
SP1S
SP1D
SP1D
SP2D
SP2D 4 1 8 5 12 9 16 13
PD2S
10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7
PD2D
10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 26 25 28 27 30 29 32 31 18 17 20 19 22 21 24 23
PD2T
Electrical interface
2 1 4 3
2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7
10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 18 17 20 19 22 21 24 23 34 33 36 35 38 37 40 39 26 25 28 27 30 29 32 31 42 41 44 43 46 45 48 47

4 PDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Figure 4-3 Front panel of the SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T
SP1D
SP1D
SP2D
SP2D 4 1 8 5 12 9 16 13
PD2S
10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7
PD2D
10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 26 25 28 27 30 29 32 31 18 17 20 19 22 21 24 23
PD2T
2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7
10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 18 17 20 19 22 21 24 23 34 33 36 35 38 37 40 39 26 25 28 27 30 29 32 31 42 41 44 43 46 45 48 47

Interfaces
The front panel of the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T has the E1 electrical interfaces.
The electrical interfaces are 2 mm HM connectors (4x6 pins). The digit on an interface indicates
the sequence number of the interface.
The front panel of the SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T has the E1 electrical interfaces. The
electrical interfaces are DB78 connectors. The digit on an interface indicates the sequence
number of the interface.
4.1.5 Valid Slots
The SP1S/SP1D can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3. The PD2S/PD2D/PD2T can be
installed in slot IU4. The SP2D can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, IU3, or integrated with the
SCB.
You can set the parameters for the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T by using the T2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T by using
the T2000:
l J2
l V5
l Service load indication
4-9
l Tributary loopback
For the description of each parameter, see 13.2 PDH Boards.
The technical specifications of the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/PD2D/PD2T include the
parameters specified for electrical interfaces, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 4-8 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/
PD2S/PD2D/PD2T.
Table 4-8 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the SP1S/SP1D/SP2D/PD2S/
PD2D/PD2T
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 2048 kbit/s
Interface impedance 75 ohms and 120 ohms
Line code pattern HDB3
Connector 2 mm HM connectorDB78 connector
Signal bit rate at the output
interface
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Allowed frequency
deviation at the input
interface
Allowed attenuation at the
input interface
Input jitter tolerance Complies with ITU-T G.823.

The mechanical specifications of the SP1S are as follows:
l Weight: 0.21 kg
The mechanical specifications of the SP1D are as follows:
l Weight: 0.24 kg
The mechanical specifications of the SP2D are as follows:
4 PDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
l Weight: 0.25 kg
The mechanical specifications of the PD2S are as follows:
l Weight: 0.54 kg
The mechanical specifications of the PD2D are as follows:
l Weight: 0.66 kg
The mechanical specifications of the PD2T are as follows:
l Weight: 0.77 kg
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption of the SP1S at room temperature (25C) is 3.95 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the SP1D at room temperature (25C) is 5 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the SP2D at room temperature (25C) is 5 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the PD2S at room temperature (25C) is 11 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the PD2D at room temperature (25C) is 14.5 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the PD2T at room temperature (25C) is 18.5 W.
4.2 SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T
technical specifications of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T.
The SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T is available in one functional version, namely,
SS42SS45.
The SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T transmits and receives E1/T1 electrical signals,
processes VC-12 path overheads, and generates alarm signals on the tributary.
The SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T consists of the interface module, coding/decoding
module, mapping/demapping module, logic control module, and power unit.
4.2.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T has interfaces, a bar code, and a laser
safety class label.
4.2.5 Valid Slots
The SM1S/SM1D can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3. The PM2S/PM2D/PM2T can be
installed in slot IU4.
You can set the parameters for the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T by using the T2000.
4-11
The technical specifications of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T include the parameters
specified for electrical interfaces, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
The SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T is available in one functional version, namely,
SS42SS45.
The SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T transmits and receives E1/T1 electrical signals,
Table 4-9 provides the functions and features of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T.
Table 4-9 Functions and features of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T
Function and
Feature
SM1S SM1D PM2S PM2D PM2T
Basic functions l The SM1S processes 4xE1/T1 signals.
l The SM1D processes 8xE1/T1 signals.
l The PM2S processes 16xE1/T1 signals.
l The PM2D processes 32xE1/T1 signals.
l The PM2T processes 48xE1/T1 signals.
Mapping
processing
Realizes the mapping and demapping between the E1 and the VC-4.
Overhead
processing
Supports the setting and querying of overhead bytes such as the J2 and V5.
Alarms and
performance
events
Clock source l The SM1S provides one reference clock source.
l The SM1D/PM2S provides two reference clock sources.
l The PM2D provides four reference clock sources.
l The PM2T provides six reference clock sources.
Protection
modes
Supports the SNCP, with a switching time of less than 50 ms.
4 PDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Function and
Feature
SM1S SM1D PM2S PM2D PM2T
Maintenance
features
l Supports inloop and outloop so that faults can be located quickly.
l Supports the setting of the overhead byte to be sent/received, thus
enabling the board to function as an overhead instrument.
degrade thresholds.
l Provides interfaces of 75 ohm unbalanced impedance and 120 ohm
balanced impedance for E1 services. Provides interfaces of 100 ohm
balanced impedance for T1 services.
l Supports the lower-order PRBS function towards the tributary direction
and cross-connect direction.

The SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T consists of the interface module, coding/decoding
Figure 4-4 shows the functional block diagram of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T.
Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T
E1/T1
Mapping
module
Demapping
module
Interface
module
Logic control
module
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
Decoding
module
Coding
module
E1/T1
5 V
Fuse
5 V
Cross-connect
unit
Backplane

4-13
Receive Direction
The interface module accesses an E1/T1 signal and sends the E1/T1 signal to the decoding
module. The decoding module decodes the E1/T1 signal to restore the HDB3 or B8ZS data signal
and clock signal, and sends the signals to the mapping module.
The mapping module asynchronously maps the E1/T1 signal into a C-12 signal, adds the path
overhead to the C-12 signal to form a VC-12 signal, adds the pointer to the VC-12 signal to form
a TU-12 signal, multiplexes the TU-12 signal to form a VC-4 signal, and finally sends the VC-4
Transmit Direction
coding module. The coding module codes the signals and outputs the E1/T1 signal through the
interface module.
SCB.
Power Unit
4.2.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T has interfaces, a bar code, and a laser
safety class label.
Figure 4-5Figure 4-6 shows the front panel of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T.
4 PDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Figure 4-5 Front panel of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T
SM1S
SM1S 2 1 4 3
SM1D
SM1D 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7
PM2S
PM2D
10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 26 25 28 27 30 29 32 31 18 17 20 19 22 21 24 23
PM2T
10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7
10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 18 17 20 19 22 21 24 23 34 33 36 35 38 37 40 39 26 25 28 27 30 29 32 31 42 41 44 43 46 45 48 47

4-15
Figure 4-6 Front panel of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T
SM1S
SM1S 2 1 4 3
SM1D
SM1D 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7
PM2S
PM2D
10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 26 25 28 27 30 29 32 31 18 17 20 19 22 21 24 23
PM2T
10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7
10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 18 17 20 19 22 21 24 23 34 33 36 35 38 37 40 39 26 25 28 27 30 29 32 31 42 41 44 43 46 45 48 47

Interfaces
The front panel of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T has the E1/T1 electrical interfaces.
The electrical interfaces are DB78 connectors. The digit on an interface indicates the sequence
number of the interface.
4.2.5 Valid Slots
The SM1S/SM1D can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3. The PM2S/PM2D/PM2T can be
installed in slot IU4.
You can set the parameters for the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T by using the T2000.
You can set the following parameters for the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T by using the
T2000:
l J2
l V5
4 PDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
The technical specifications of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/PM2T include the parameters
Table 4-10 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/
PM2D/PM2T.
Table 4-10 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the SM1S/SM1D/PM2S/PM2D/
PM2T
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 1544 kbit/s, 2048 kbit/s
Interface impedance 100/120 ohms and 75 ohms
Line code pattern T1: B8ZS
E1: HDB3
Connector 2 mm HM connectorDB78 connector
Signal bit rate at the
output interface
Allowed frequency
interface
Allowed attenuation
at the input interface
Input jitter tolerance T1: Complies with ITU-T G.824.
E1: Complies with ITU-T G.823.

The mechanical specifications of the SM1S are as follows:
l Weight: 0.20 kg
The mechanical specifications of the SM1D are as follows:
l Weight: 0.22 kg
The mechanical specifications of the PM2S are as follows:
l Weight: 0.52 kg
4-17
The mechanical specifications of the PM2D are as follows:
l Weight: 0.64 kg
The mechanical specifications of the PM2T are as follows:
l Weight: 0.74 kg
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption of the SM1S at room temperature (25C) is 4 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the SM1D at room temperature (25C) is 4.5 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the PM2S at room temperature (25C) is 9 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the PM2D at room temperature (25C) is 10 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the PM2T at room temperature (25C) is 11 W.
4.3 PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T
technical specifications of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T.
The PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T is available in one functional version, namely,
SS42SS45.
The PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T transmits and receives E3/T3 electrical signals,
The PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T consists of the interface module, coding/decoding
4.3.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T has indicators, interfaces, a bar
code, and a laser safety class label.
4.3.5 Valid Slots
The PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3.
You can set the parameters for the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T by using the T2000.
The technical specifications of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T include the parameters
The PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T is available in one functional version, namely,
SS42SS45.
4 PDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
The PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T transmits and receives E3/T3 electrical signals,
Table 4-11 provides the functions and features of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T.
Table 4-11 Functions and features of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T
Function and
Feature
PE3S PE3D PE3T PT3S PT3D PT3T
Basic functions l The PE3S processes 1xE3 signals.
l The PE3D processes 2xE3 signals.
l The PE3T processes 3xE3 signals.
l The PT3S processes 1xT3 signals.
l The PT3D processes 2xT3 signals.
l The PT3T processes 3xT3 signals.
Mapping
processing
Maps E3 or T3 signals into a VC-4 signal by using the asynchronous
mapping and multiplexing method.
Overhead
processing
Supports the setting and querying of overhead bytes such as the J1 and
C2.
Alarms and
performance
events
Clock source The PE3S/PT3S provides one reference clock source.
The PE3D/PT3D/PE3T/PT3T provides two reference clock sources.
Protection modes Supports the SNCP, with a switching time of less than 50 ms.
Maintenance
features
l Supports the setting of the overhead byte to be sent/received, thus
enabling the board to function as an overhead instrument.
degrade thresholds.
l Provides interfaces of 75 ohm unbalanced impedance.
l Supports the lower-order PRBS function towards the tributary
direction and cross-connect direction.

4-19
The PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T consists of the interface module, coding/decoding
Figure 4-7 shows the functional block diagram of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T.
Figure 4-7 Functional block diagram of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T
E3/T3
Mapping
module
Demapping
module
Interface
module
Logic control
module
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit
Decoding
module
Coding
module
5 V
Fuse
5 V
E3/T3
Cross-connect
unit
Backplane

Receive Direction
The interface module accesses an E3/T3 signal and sends the E3/T3 signal to the decoding
module. The decoding module decodes the E3/T3 signal to restore the HDB3 or B8ZS data signal
and clock signal, and sends the signals to the mapping module.
The mapping module asynchronously maps the E3/T3 signal into a C-3 signal, adds the path
overhead to the C-3 signal to form a VC-3 signal, adds the pointer to the VC-3 signal to form a
TU-3 signal, multiplexes the TU-3 signal to form a VC-4 signal, and finally sends the VC-4
Transmit Direction
coding module. The coding module codes the signals and outputs the E3/T3 signal through the
interface module.
SCB.
4 PDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Power Unit
4.3.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T has indicators, interfaces, a bar
code, and a laser safety class label.
Figure 4-8Figure 4-9 shows the front panel of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T.
Figure 4-8 Front panel of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T
PE3S/PT3S
TX1 RX1
PE3D/PT3D
TX2 RX2
TX1 RX1
PE3T/PT3T
TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3
TX1 RX1
SMB electrical
interface-Rx
SMB electrical
interface-Tx

4-21
Figure 4-9 Front panel of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T
PE3S/PT3S
TX1 RX1
PE3D/PT3D
TX2 RX2
TX1 RX1
PE3T/PT3T
TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3
TX1 RX1
SMB electrical
interface-Rx
SMB electrical
interface-Tx

Interfaces
The front panel of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T has the E3/T3 electrical interfaces.
The electrical interfaces are SMB coaxial connectors. The digit on an interface indicates the
sequence number of the interface. Tx indicates the transmit end and Rx indicates the receive
end.
4.3.5 Valid Slots
The PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3.
You can set the parameters for the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T by using the T2000.
You can set the following parameters for the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T by using the
T2000:
l J2
l V5
The technical specifications of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T include the parameters
4 PDH Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 4-12 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/
PT3S/PT3D/PT3T.
Table 4-12 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/
PT3D/PT3T
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 34368 kbit/s, 44736 kbit/s
Interface impedance 75 ohms
Line code pattern T3: B8ZS
E3: HDB3
Connector SMB coaxial connector
Signal bit rate at the
output interface
Allowed frequency
interface
Allowed attenuation at
the input interface
Input jitter tolerance T3: Complies with ITU-T G.824.
E3: Complies with ITU-T G.823.

The mechanical specifications of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T are as follows:
l Weight: 0.28 kg
Power Consumption
The maximum power consumption of the PE3S/PE3D/PE3T/PT3S/PT3D/PT3T at room
temperature (25C) is 7.0 W.
4-23
5 Data Boards
About This Chapter
This topic describes the data boards, including the Ethernet service boards and ATM service
boards.
5.1 ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 (Supporting the ML-PPP Protocol)
technical specifications of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1.
5.2 EFT/ELT2/EGT (Supporting the GFP Protocol)
technical specifications of the EFT/ELT2/EGT.
5.3 EFS/EFS4/EFSC/EGS (Supporting the GFP Protocol)
technical specifications of the EFS/EFS4/EFSC/EGS.
5.4 AIUD/AIUQ
technical specifications of the AIUD/AIUQ.
5.5 N64/N64Q/FP2D
technical specifications of the N64/N64Q/FP2D.
5.6 SHLQ
technical specifications of the SHLQ.
5.7 TDA
technical specifications of the TDA.
Hardware Description 5 Data Boards
5-1
5.1 ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 (Supporting the ML-PPP Protocol)
technical specifications of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1.
The ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 is available in one functional version, namely, SS42.The ET1/ET1O/
ET1D is available in one functional version, namely, SS45.
The ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 accesses 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet services, supports various types of
Ethernet services, and provides the Ethernet over SDH (EOS) function.
The ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 consists of the interface module, service processing module,
encapsulation module, mapping module, communication and control module, and power unit.
5.1.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser
safety class label.
5.1.5 Valid Slots
The ET1D can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3. The ET1/ET1O/EF1 can be installed in slot
IU4.
5.1.6 Feature Code
You can set the parameters for the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 by using the T2000.
The technical specifications of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 include the parameters specified for
The ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 is available in one functional version, namely, SS42.The ET1/ET1O/
ET1D is available in one functional version, namely, SS45.
The ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 accesses 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet services, supports various types of
Ethernet services, and provides the Ethernet over SDH (EOS) function.
l The ET1 is an 8x10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical interface board.
l The ET1O is an 8x10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical interface board.
l The ET1D is a 2x10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical interface board.
l The EF1 is a 4x10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical interface board and a 2x100 Mbit/s
Ethernet optical interface board.
Table 5-1Table 5-2 provides the functions and features of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1.
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 5-1 Functions and features of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1
Function and Feature ET1 ET1O ET1D EF1
Number of FE electrical
interfaces
8 8 2 4
Number of FE optical interfaces - - - 2
Connector type RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 Electrical:
RJ-45
Optical: LC
Working
mode
Electrical
interface
Auto-
negotiation
10M/
100M full-
duplex
10M/
100M half-
duplex
Auto-
negotiation
10M/100M
full-duplex
10M/100M
half-duplex
Auto-
negotiation
10M/100M
full-duplex
10M/100M
half-duplex
Auto-
negotiation
10M/100M
full-duplex
10M/100M
half-duplex
Optical interface - - - 100M full-
duplex
Encapsulation protocol ML-PPP
VC-4 bandwidth on the SDH
side
1xVC-4 1xVC-4 1xVC-4 1xVC-4
Bound bandwidth 48xE1 48xE1 16xE1 48xE1
Number of VCTRUNKs 16 16 16 16
Layer 2 switching - Supported Supported Supported
VLAN Supporte
d
Supported Supported Supported
EPL Supporte
d
- Supported -
EVPL - - - -
EPLAN - Supported Supported Supported
EVPLAN - - - -
STP - Supported Supported Supported
IGMP-SNOOPING - Supported Supported Supported
RMON Supporte
d
Supported Supported Supported

5-3
Table 5-2 Functions and features of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D
Function and Feature ET1 ET1O ET1D
interfaces
8 8 2
Number of FE optical
interfaces
- - -
Connector type RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45
Working
mode
Electrical
interface
Auto-negotiation
10M/100M full-
duplex
10M/100M half-
duplex
Auto-negotiation
10M/100M full-
duplex
10M/100M half-
duplex
Auto-negotiation
10M/100M full-
duplex
10M/100M half-
duplex
Optical
interface
- - -
Encapsulation protocol ML-PPP
VC-4 bandwidth on the
SDH side
1xVC-4 1xVC-4 1xVC-4
Bound bandwidth 48xE1 48xE1 16xE1
Number of VCTRUNKs 16 16 16
Layer 2 switching - Supported Supported
VLAN Supported Supported Supported
EPL Supported - Supported
EVPL - - -
EPLAN - Supported Supported
EVPLAN - - -
STP - Supported Supported
IGMP-SNOOPING - Supported Supported
RMON Supported Supported Supported

In addition, the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 provides the following functions:
l Supports multiple loopback modes so that faults can be located and rectified quickly.
l Counts frame traffic, reports frame statistics, and reports alarms when errors are detected.
The ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 consists of the interface module, service processing module,
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Figure 5-1 shows the functional block diagram of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1.
Figure 5-1 Functional block diagram of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
Service
processing
module
Encapsula-
tion module
Mapping
module
Interface
module
5 V
Fuse
5 V
Communication
and control module
10/100 Mbit/s
10/100 Mbit/s Cross-connect
unit
Backplane

Receive Direction
The interface module accesses the signals sent from the external Ethernet equipment such as a
LAN switch or a router, decodes the signals, converts the signals into parallel signals, and sends
the parallel signals to the service processing module. The service processing module performs
frame delimitation, preamble stripping, cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code termination, and
Ethernet performance counting for the parallel signals. The service processing module also
classifies the traffic for the parallel signals according to the service type and configuration
requirements. Then, the service processing module sends the signals to the mapping module for
VC-12 mapping. Finally, the mapping module sends the signals to the cross-connect unit.
Transmit Direction
The mapping module demaps the VC-12 signals from the cross-connect unit and sends the
signals to the encapsulation module. The encapsulation module encapsulates the signals and
sends the signals to the service processing module. The service processing module determines
the route according to the level of the equipment, classifies the traffic according to the service
type and configuration requirements, performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC code
calculation, and Ethernet performance counting, and sends the signals to the interface module.
The interface module converts the signals into serial signals, encodes the signals, and sends the
signals through an Ethernet port.
Communication and Control Module
This module provides the communication function, control function, and service configuration
function.
Power Unit
5-5
5.1.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser
safety class label.
Figure 5-2 shows the front panel of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1. The LC optical interfaces of the
EF1 are considered as an example to show the optical interfaces of the EF1.
Figure 5-2 Front panel of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1
EF1
7 6 5 4 3 8
ET1/ET1O
ET1D
ET1D
RUN
ALM
1 2
RUN ALM
RUN ALM
1 2
4 3 1 2
ACT ACT
LINK LINK
6 5
Board indicators
Indicators for the Ethernet
electrical interfaces
Ethernet electrical
interface
Ethernet optical
interface

Figure 5-3 shows the front panel of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D.
Figure 5-3 Front panel of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D
7 6 5 4 3 8
ET1/ET1O
ET1
D
ET1D
RUN
ALM
1 2
RUN ALM 1 2
Board indicators

5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Indicators
The front panel of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 has board indicators and Ethernet interface
indicators. Table 5-3 provides the meanings of the statuses of the indicators.
Table 5-3 Indicators on the front panel of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1
ALM: red alarm
indicator
Constantly off No alarm occurs on the board.
Flashing three times every other
second
A critical alarm occurs on the
board.
Flashing twice every other second A major alarm occurs on the
board.
Flashing once every other second A minor alarm occurs on the
board.
Constantly on The board self-check fails.
RUN: green
running indicator
Flashing five times every second The board is offline.
Flashing once every second The board operates normally.
Connection
status indicator of
the Ethernet
interface (green)
Constantly on The network cable or fiber is
correctly connected to the
interface.
Constantly off The network cable or fiber
fails to connect to the
interface.
Data transceiving
indicator of the
Ethernet
interface
(orange)
Constantly on or flashing The interface is transmitting
or receiving data.
Constantly off The interface is not
transmitting or receiving data.

Interfaces
The RJ-45 electrical interfaces on the front panel of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 are used to
transmit and receive 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical signals.
The MT-RJ/LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the EF1 are used to transmit and receive
100 Mbit/s Ethernet optical signals.
5.1.5 Valid Slots
The ET1D can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3. The ET1/ET1O/EF1 can be installed in slot
IU4.
5-7
5.1.6 Feature Code
Table 5-4 provides the relationship between the feature code of the EF1 and the type of optical
interface.
Table 5-4 Relationship between the feature code of the EF1 and the type of optical interface
SS42EF101 01 S-1.1, MT-RJ
SS42EF102 02 Ie-1, MT-RJ
SS42EF103 03 S-1.1, LC
SS42EF104 04 Ie-1, LC

You can set the parameters for the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 by using the T2000.
For the setting of the parameters that need to be set for the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1, see 13.3 Data
Boards.
NOTE
The ET1O and ET1D support only the packets that are of the tag aware type or access type.
The technical specifications of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1 include the parameters specified for
Table 5-5 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/
EF1.
Table 5-5 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the ET1/ET1O/ET1D/EF1
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s
Access
capability
ET1/ET1O: 8x10/100 Mbit/s signals
ET1D: 2x10/100 Mbit/s signals
EF1: 4x10/100 Mbit/s electrical signals
Line code
pattern
Manchester encoding signal (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 encoding signal
(100 Mbit/s)
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Parameter Value
Connector type RJ-45
Specifications
of the electrical
interfaces
Complies with IEEE 802.3.

Table 5-6 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EF1.
Table 5-6 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EF1
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 100 Mbit/s
Line code
pattern
MLT-3 encoding signal
Type of optical
interface
S-1.1 Ie-1 S-1.1 Ie-1
Fiber type Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
MT-RJ
Multi-mode
MT-RJ
Central
wavelength
(nm)
1310 1310 1300 1300
Maximum
transmission
distance (km)
15 2 15 2
Launched
optical power
(dBm)
-15 to -8 -19.5 to -14 -15 to -8 -19 to -14
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-31 -29 -31 -30

The mechanical specifications of the ET1/ET1O are as follows:
l Weight: 0.74 kg
The mechanical specifications of the EF1 are as follows:
5-9
l Weight: 0.68 kg
The mechanical specifications of the ET1D are as follows:
l Weight: 0.26 kg
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption of the ET1/ET1O at room temperature (25C) is 26.1
W.
l The maximum power consumption of the ET1D at room temperature (25C) is 16 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the EF1 at room temperature (25C) is 25 W.
5.2 EFT/ELT2/EGT (Supporting the GFP Protocol)
technical specifications of the EFT/ELT2/EGT.
The EFT/ELT2/EGT is available in one functional version, namely, SS42SS45.
The EFT/ELT2/EGT accesses 10/100/1000 Mbit/s Ethernet services and supports the Ethernet
private line (EPL) services.
The EFT/ELT2/EGT consists of the interface module, service processing module, encapsulation
module, mapping module, communication and control module, and power unit.
5.2.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the EFT/ELT2/EGT has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.
5.2.5 Valid Slots
The EFT/ELT2/EGT can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3.
5.2.6 Feature Code
You can set the parameters for the EFT/ELT2/EGT by using the T2000.
The technical specifications of the EFT/ELT2/EGT include the parameters specified for
The EFT/ELT2/EGT is available in one functional version, namely, SS42SS45.
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
The EFT/ELT2/EGT accesses 10/100/1000 Mbit/s Ethernet services and supports the Ethernet
private line (EPL) services.
The EFT/ELT2/EGT adopts the generic framing procedure (GFP), link access procedure-SDH
(LAPS), or high level data link control (HDLC) protocol to encapsulate Ethernet frames. The
mapping granularity is VC-12 and VC-3.
Table 5-7 provides the functions and features of the EFT/ELT2/EGT.
Table 5-7 Functions and features of the EFT/ELT2/EGT
Function and Feature EFT ELT2 EGT
interfaces
4 - -
Number of FE optical
interfaces
- 2 -
Number of GE optical
interfaces
- - 1
Connector RJ-45 LC LC
Interface type 10/100BASE-T(X) 100BASE-FX 1000BASE-LX/
SX
Working
mode
FE electrical
interface
Auto-negotiation
10M/100M full-
duplex
- -
FE optical
interface
- 100M full-duplex -
GE optical
interface
- - Auto-negotiation
1000M full-duplex
VC-4 bandwidth on the SDH
side
2xVC-4 2xVC-4 2xVC-4
Bound bandwidth 6xVC-3, or
63xVC-12 +
3xVC-3
6xVC-3, or
63xVC-12 + 3xVC-3
6xVC-3, or
63xVC-12
Number of VCTRUNKs 4 2 1
Layer 2 switching - - -
VLAN - - -
EVPL - - -
EPL Supported Supported Supported
EPLAN - - -
5-11
Function and Feature EFT ELT2 EGT
EVPLAN - - -
STP - - -
GFP Supported Supported Supported
LAPS Supported Supported Supported
HDLC Supported Supported Supported
LPT Supported Supported Supported
Test frame Supported Supported Supported
CAR - - -
IGMP-SNOOPING - - -
LCAS V2 protocol Supported Supported Supported
Ethernet OAM - - -
RMON Supported Supported Supported

In addition, the EFT/ELT2/EGT provides the following functions:
l Supports inloop so that faults can be located and rectified quickly.
The EFT/ELT2/EGT consists of the interface module, service processing module, encapsulation
Figure 5-4 shows the functional block diagram of the EFT/ELT2/EGT.
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Figure 5-4 Functional block diagram of the EFT/ELT2/EGT
Service
processing
module
Encapsula-
tion module
Mapping
module
Communication
and control module
Cross-connect
unit
10/100/1000 Mbit/s
Interface
module
SCC unit
5 V
Fuse
5 V
10/100/1000 Mbit/s Cross-connect
unit
Backplane

Receive Direction
frame delimitation, preamble stripping, cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code termination, and
Ethernet performance counting for the parallel signals. The service processing module also
classifies the traffic for the parallel signals according to the service type and configuration
requirements. Then, the service processing module sends the signals to the mapping module for
VC-12 or VC-3 mapping. Finally, the mapping module sends the signals to the cross-connect
unit.
Transmit Direction
The mapping module demaps the VC-12 or VC-3 signals from the cross-connect unit and sends
the signals to the encapsulation module. The encapsulation module encapsulates the signals and
function.
Power Unit
5-13
5.2.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the EFT/ELT2/EGT has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.
Figure 5-5Figure 5-6 shows the front panel of the EFT/ELT2/EGT.
Figure 5-5 Front panel of the EFT/ELT2/EGT
EGT
EGT
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
LINK
ACT
ELT2
LINK
ACT
2
ELT2
1
LINK
ACT
EFT
EFT
RUN
ALM
2 1 3 4

Figure 5-6 Front panel of the EFT/ELT2/EGT
EGT
EGT
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
LINK
ACT
ELT2
LINK
ACT
2
ELT2
1
LINK
ACT
EFT
EFT
RUN
ALM
2 1 3 4
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)

Indicators
The front panel has the indicators that indicate the board status and the Ethernet connection
status. Table 5-8 provides the meanings of the statuses of the indicators.
Table 5-8 Indicators on the front panel of the EFT/ELT2/EGT
ALM: red alarm
indicator
Flashing three times
every other second
A critical alarm occurs on the board.
Flashing twice every
other second
A major alarm occurs on the board.
Flashing once every
other second
A minor alarm occurs on the board.
RUN: green
running indicator
Flashing five times
every second
The board is offline.
Flashing once every
second
The board operates normally.
Connection status
indicator of the
Ethernet interface -
LINK (green)
Constantly on The network cable or fiber is correctly
connected to the interface.
Constantly off The network cable or fiber fails to
connect to the interface.
Data transceiving
indicator of the
ACT (orange)
Constantly on or
flashing
The interface is transmitting or
receiving data.
Constantly off The interface is not transmitting or
receiving data.

Interfaces
The RJ-45 electrical interfaces on the front panel of the EFT are used to transmit and receive
10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical signals.
The LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the ELT2 are used to transmit and receive FE
optical signals.
The SFP optical interfaces on the front panel of the EGT are used to transmit and receive GE
optical signals.
5.2.5 Valid Slots
The EFT/ELT2/EGT can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3.
5-15
5.2.6 Feature Code
Table 5-9Table 5-10 provides the relationship between the feature code of the ELT2 and the
Table 5-9 Relationship between the feature code of the ELT2 and the type of optical interface
SS42ELT201 01 S-1.1, LC
SS42ELT202 02 Ie-1, LC

Table 5-10 Relationship between the feature code of the EGT6 and the type of optical interface
SS45ELT201 01 S-1.1, LC
SS45ELT202 02 Ie-1, LC

Table 5-11Table 5-12 provides the relationship between the feature code of the EGT and the
Table 5-11 Relationship between the feature code of the EGT and the type of optical interface
SS42EGT02 02 1000BASE-LX
SS42EGT03 03 1000BASE-SX

Table 5-12 Relationship between the feature code of the EGT and the type of optical interface
SS45EGT03 03 1000BASE-LX
SS45EGT04 04 1000BASE-SX

You can set the parameters for the EFT/ELT2/EGT by using the T2000.
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
For the setting of the parameters that need to be set for the EFT/ELT2/EGT, see 13.3 Data
Boards.
The technical specifications of the EFT/ELT2/EGT include the parameters specified for
Table 5-13 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EFT.
Table 5-13 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EFT
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s
Line code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 encoding signal
(100 Mbit/s)
Specifications of the

Table 5-14 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the ELT2.
Table 5-14 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the ELT2
Parameter Value
Type of optical interface S-1.1 Ie-1
Fiber type Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Central wavelength (nm) 1310 1310
Maximum transmission
distance (km)
15 2
Launched optical power
(dBm)
-15 to -8 -19.5 to -14
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -31 -29
Minimum overload (dBm) -7 -12

5-17
Table 5-15 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EGT.
Table 5-15 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EGT
Parameter Value
Line code pattern 8B/10B encoding signal
Type of optical interface 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-SX
Fiber type Single-mode LC Multi-mode LC
distance (km)
15 0.5
(dBm)
-9.5 to -3 -9.5 to -2.5
Minimum overload (dBm) -3 0

The mechanical specifications of the EFT are as follows:
l Weight: 0.25 kg
The mechanical specifications of the ELT2 are as follows:
l Weight: 0.22 kg
The mechanical specifications of the EGT are as follows:
l Weight: 0.20 kg
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption of the EFT at room temperature (25C) is 8 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the ELT2 at room temperature (25C) is 9 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the EGT at room temperature (25C) is 11 W.
5.3 EFS/EFS4/EFSC/EGS (Supporting the GFP Protocol)
technical specifications of the EFS/EFS4/EFSC/EGS.
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
The EFS/EFSC/EGS is available in one functional version, namely, SS42. The EFS4 is also
available in one functional version, namely, SS48.The EFS/EFSC/EGS is available in one
functional version, namely, SS45. The EFS4 is also available in one functional version, namely,
SS48.
The EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4 accesses 10/100/1000 Mbit/s Ethernet services, supports the EPL
services, Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) services, Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) services,
and Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) services, and provides the EOS function.
The EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4 consists of the interface module, service processing module,
5.3.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser
safety class label.
5.3.5 Valid Slots
The EFS/EGS/EFS4 can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3. The EFSC can be installed in slot
IU4.
5.3.6 Feature Code
You can set the parameters for the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4 by using the T2000.
The technical specifications of the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4 include the parameters specified for
The EFS/EFSC/EGS is available in one functional version, namely, SS42. The EFS4 is also
available in one functional version, namely, SS48.The EFS/EFSC/EGS is available in one
functional version, namely, SS45. The EFS4 is also available in one functional version, namely,
SS48.
The EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4 accesses 10/100/1000 Mbit/s Ethernet services, supports the EPL
services, Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) services, Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) services,
and Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) services, and provides the EOS function.
Table 5-16 provides the functions and features of the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4.
Table 5-16 Functions and features of the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4
Function and Feature EFS EFSC EGS EFS4
Number of FE electrical interfaces 4 12 - 4
5-19
Number of FE optical interfaces - - - -
Number of GE optical interfaces - - 1 -
Connector RJ-45 RJ-45 LC RJ-45
Interface type 10/100BAS
E-T(X)
10/100BAS
E-T(X)
1000BAS
E-LX/SX
100BASE-
TX
Working
mode
FE electrical
interface
Auto-
negotiation
10M/100M
half-duplex
10M/100M
full-duplex
Auto-
negotiation
10M/100M
half-duplex
10M/100M
full-duplex
- Auto-
negotiation
100M full-
duplex
FE optical interface - - - -
GE optical
interface
- - 1000M
full-
duplex
-
VC-4 bandwidth on the SDH side 4xVC-4 4xVC-4 4xVC-4 4xVC-4
Encapsulation format GFP GFP GFP GFP, LAPS,
HDLC
Bound bandwidth 12xVC-3,
or
126xVC-12
+ 6xVC-3
12xVC-3,
or
126xVC-12
+ 6xVC-3
12xVC-3,
or
126xVC-1
2 +
6xVC-3
12xVC-3, or
63xVC-12 +
9xVC-3
Number of VCTRUNKs 24 24 24 8
Layer 2 switching Supported Supported Supported Supported
VLAN Supported Supported Supported Supported
EPL Supported Supported Supported Supported
EVPL Supported Supported Supported Supported
EPLAN Supported Supported Supported Supported
EVPLAN Supported Supported Supported Supported
STP Supported Supported Supported Supported
CoS Supported Supported Supported Supported
Link aggregation group (LAG) - - - Supported
Port mirroring - - - Supported
QinQ - - - Supported
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
LPT Supported Supported Supported Supported
Test frame Supported Supported Supported Supported
CAR Supported Supported Supported Supported
IGMP-SNOOPING Supported Supported Supported Supported
LCAS V2 protocol Supported Supported Supported Supported
Ethernet OAM Supported Supported Supported Supported
RMON Supported Supported Supported Supported

In addition, the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4 provides the following functions:
l Supports inloop so that faults can be located and rectified quickly.
l The EGS supports the ALS function.
l The EFS4 supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization function. The time
synchronization function complies with IEEE 1588 V2.
l The EFS4 supports the synchronous Ethernet clock.
The EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4 consists of the interface module, service processing module,
Figure 5-7 shows the functional block diagram of the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4.
Figure 5-7 Functional block diagram of the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4
Service
processing
module
Encapsula-
tion module
Mapping
module
Communication
and control module
Cross-connect
unit
10/100/1000 Mbit/s
Interface
module
SCC unit
5 V
Fuse
5 V
10/100/1000 Mbit/s Cross-connect
unit
Backplane
5-21

Receive Direction
frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC code termination, and Ethernet performance
counting for the parallel signals. The service processing module also classifies the traffic for the
parallel signals according to the service type and configuration requirements. Then, the service
processing module sends the signals to the mapping module for VC-12 or VC-3 mapping.
Finally, the mapping module sends the signals to the cross-connect unit.
Transmit Direction
The mapping module demaps the VC-12 or VC-3 signals from the cross-connect unit and sends
the signals to the encapsulation module. The encapsulation module encapsulates the signals and
Communication and Control module
function.
Power Unit
5.3.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser
safety class label.
Figure 5-8Figure 5-9 shows the front panel of the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4.
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Figure 5-8 Front panel of the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4
EGS
RUN
EGS
ALM
LINK
ACT
Ethernet optical interface
4 3
EFSC
1 2 7 6 5 8 11 10 9 12
ALM
RUN
Board indicators
Ethernet electrical
interface
EFS4
EFS
EFS
EFS4
RUN
ALM
2 1 3 4
RUN
2 1 3 4
ALM

Figure 5-9 Front panel of the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4
EGS
RUN
EGS
ALM
LINK
ACT
Ethernet optical interface
4 3
EFSC
1 2 7 6 5 8 11 10 9 12
ALM
RUN
Board indicators
Ethernet electrical
interface
EFS
EFS
RUN
ALM
2 1 3 4

Indicators
The front panel has the indicators that indicate the board status and the Ethernet connection
status. Table 5-17 provides the meanings of the statuses of the indicators.
5-23
Table 5-17 Indicators on the front panel of the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4
ALM: red alarm
indicator
every other second
Flashing twice every
other second
Flashing once every
other second
RUN: green
running indicator
Flashing five times
every second
Flashing once every
second
Connection status
indicator of the
LINK (green)
Constantly on The network cable or fiber is correctly
Constantly off The network cable or fiber fails to
connect to the interface.
Data transceiving
indicator of the
ACT (orange)
Constantly on or
flashing
receiving data.
receiving data.

Interfaces
The RJ-45 electrical interfaces on the front panel of the EFS/EFSC are used to transmit and
receive 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical signals.
The RJ-45 electrical interfaces on the front panel of the EFS4 are used to transmit and receive
100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical signals.
The SFP optical interfaces on the front panel of the EGS are used to transmit and receive GE
optical signals.
5.3.5 Valid Slots
The EFS/EGS/EFS4 can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3. The EFSC can be installed in slot
IU4.
5.3.6 Feature Code
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 5-18Table 5-19 provides the relationship between the feature code of the EGS and the
Table 5-18 Relationship between the feature code of the EGS and the type of optical interface
SS42EGS011 011 1000BASE-SX
SS42EGS012 012 1000BASE-LX

Table 5-19 Relationship between the feature code of the EGS and the type of optical interface
SS45EGS011 011 1000BASE-SX
SS45EGS012 012 1000BASE-LX

You can set the parameters for the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4 by using the T2000.
For the setting of the parameters that need to be set for the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4, see 13.3 Data
Boards.
The technical specifications of the EFS/EFSC/EGS/EFS4 include the parameters specified for
Table 5-20 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EFS/EFSC/EFS4.
Table 5-20 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the EFS/EFSC/EFS4
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 10 Mbit/s (not supported by the EFS4), 100 Mbit/s
Line code
pattern
Manchester encoding signal (10 Mbit/s), MLT-3 encoding signal (100
Mbit/s)
Specifications
of the electrical
interfaces

5-25
Table 5-21 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EGS.
Table 5-21 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EGS
Parameter Value
Line code pattern 8B/10B encoding signal
Type of optical interface 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-SX
Fiber type Single-mode LC Multi-mode LC
distance (km)
15 0.5
(dBm)
-9 to -3 -9.5 to -2.5
Minimum overload (dBm) -3 0

The mechanical specifications of the EFS are as follows:
l Weight: 0.26 kg
The mechanical specifications of the EFS4 are as follows:
l Weight: 0.25 kg
The mechanical specifications of the EGS are as follows:
l Weight: 0.3 kg
The mechanical specifications of the EFSC are as follows:
l Weight: 0.6 kg
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption of the EFS at room temperature (25C) is 23 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the EFS4 at room temperature (25C) is 15 W.
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
l The maximum power consumption of the EFSC at room temperature (25C) is 22 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the EGS at room temperature (25C) is 25 W.
5.4 AIUD/AIUQ
technical specifications of the AIUD/AIUQ.
The AIUD/AIUQ is available in one functional version, namely, SS42.The AIUD/AIUQ is
available in one functional version, namely, SS45.
The AIUD/AIUQ supports ATM switching and ATM protection.
The AIUD/AIUQ consists of the physical layer processing module, ATM service processing
5.4.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the AIUD/AIUQ has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.
5.4.5 Valid Slots
The AIUD/AIUQ can be installed in slot IU4.
5.4.6 Feature Code
You can set the parameters for the AIUD/AIUQ by using the T2000.
The technical specifications of the AIUD/AIUQ include the parameters specified for optical
The AIUD/AIUQ is available in one functional version, namely, SS42.The AIUD/AIUQ is
The AIUD/AIUQ supports ATM switching and ATM protection.
The AIUD supports two external ports and two internal ports.
The AIUQ supports four external ports and four internal ports.
The AIUD/AIUQ accesses a maximum of 155 Mbit/s ATM services.
The ATM service is accessed by the optical fiber and is in the SDH frame structure. The payload
is the ATM service.
The AIUD/AIUQ multiplexes and maps the ATM service, loads the ATM service into SDH
VC-4s, and finally sends the SDH VC-4 signals to the SDH network.
5-27
Table 5-22 provides the functions and features of the AIUD/AIUQ.
Table 5-22 Functions and features of the AIUD/AIUQ
Function and
Feature
AIUD/AIUQ
Basic functions l Accesses and processes 2/4xSTM-1 ATM services.
l Supports the configuration of multicast ATM services and point-to-
point ATM services (including spatial multicast services and logical
multicast services).
l Converges ATM services.
Type of optical
interface
Supports the optical interfaces of typeIe-1 and type S-1.1.
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
4xVC-4
Mapping mod VC-4
Service types CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR
ATM flow control Supports 15 flow control modes according to ITU-T Recommendations.
Alarm monitoring Monitors the alarms of ATM service. All the ATM-related alarms can
be reported.
ATM protection
modes
Provides the protection function for ATM services. Provides the VP/VC
connection-based 1+1/1:1 protection.
ATM
performance
counting
Measures the performance of ATM services. All the ATM-related
performances can be measured.
Maintenance
features
Provides the ATM OAM function. The AIUD/AIUQ can send loopback
(LB) cells and continuity check (CC) cells to test the continuity. The
AIUD/AIUQ can also capture the alarm indication signal (AIS) and
remote defect indication (RDI) cells.

The AIUD/AIUQ consists of the physical layer processing module, ATM service processing
Figure 5-10 shows the functional block diagram of the AIUD/AIUQ.
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Figure 5-10 Functional block diagram of the AIUD/AIUQ
Backplane
Physical
layer
processing
module
ATM
service
processing
module
Mapping
module
Communication
and control module
Cross-connect
unit
STM-1
SCC unit
STM-1
5 V
Fuse
5 V
Cross-connect
unit

Receive Direction
The STM-1 signals accessed by an optical interface are sent to the physical layer processing
module after O/E conversion. The physical layer processing module restores the data signal and
clock signal and performs SDH functions such as frame alignment, descrambling, overhead
processing, and pointer processing. The physical layer processing module also performs ATM
cell delimitation, descrambling, and filtering. The ATM service processing module establishes
and releases connections, and sets parameters for ATM services. Then, the ATM service
processing module sends the ATM services to the mapping module. The mapping module maps
the ATM services into VC-4s and sends the VC-4 signals to the cross-connect unit.
Transmit Direction
The mapping module demaps the VC-4 signals from the cross-connect unit and sends the signals
to the ATM service processing module. The ATM service processing module establishes and
releases connections, and sets parameters for the signals. In the case of upstream signals, the
signals are then sent to the mapping module and finally sent to the cross-connect unit. In the
case of downstream signals, the signals are then sent to the physical layer processing module.
The physical layer processing module matches the cell rate, inserts idle cells, scrambles cells,
inserts overhead bytes, and performs multiplexing and scrambling. The signals are finally
transmitted after O/E conversion.
function.
5-29
Power Unit
5.4.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the AIUD/AIUQ has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class
label.
Figure 5-11Figure 5-12 shows the front panel of the AIUD/AIUQ by considering the LC optical
Figure 5-11 Front panel of the AIUD/AIUQ
AIUD
ETHERNET 2 1 ALM RUN RST RS232 CD RXD TXD
AIUQ
ETHERNET ALM RUN RST RS232 CD RXD TXD 2 1 4 3
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT

Figure 5-12 Front panel of the AIUD/AIUQ
AIUD
ETHERNET 2 1 ALM RUN RST RS232 CD RXD TXD
AIUQ
ETHERNET ALM RUN RST RS232 CD RXD TXD 2 1 4 3
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT

Indicators
Table 5-23 provides the meanings of the statuses of the indicators.
Table 5-23 Indicators on the front panel of the AIUD/AIUQ
Silk Screen Description Status Meaning
ALM Alarm
indicator
Flashing three times every other
second
Flashing twice every other second A major alarm occurs on the board.
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Silk Screen Description Status Meaning
Flashing once every other second A minor alarm occurs on the board.
Constantly on The CPU self-check fails.
The programmable chip is working
abnormally.
RUN Running
indicator
Flashing five times every second The board is not in the working state.
Flashing once every second The board is in the working state.
Flashing once every other second The board is offline. It fails to
communicate with the SCB.
CO Indicators of
the Ethernet
port
Carrier detection
RXD Receiving
TXD Transmission
- Indicator for
fiber
connection
When the fiber is properly connected, the indicator is on. Otherwise, the
indicator is off.

Interfaces
Table 5-24 describes the interfaces of the AIUD/AIUQ.
Table 5-24 Interfaces of the AIUD/AIUQ
Interface Description Type of Connector
1-4 Transmits and receives STM-1 ATM
optical signals.
MT-RJ/LC
RS-232 Debugging port DB9
ETHERNET Network management interface RJ-45

5.4.5 Valid Slots
The AIUD/AIUQ can be installed in slot IU4.
5.4.6 Feature Code
Table 5-25 provides the relationship between the feature code of the AIUD and the type of
optical interface.
5-31
Table 5-25 Relationship between the feature code of the AIUD and the type of optical interface
SS42AIUB01 B01 Ie-1, MT-RJ
SS42AIUB02 B02 S-1.1, MT-RJ
SS42AIUD01 D01 Ie-1, LC
SS42AIUD02 D02 S-1.1, LC

Table 5-26 provides the relationship between the feature code of the AIUQ and the type of
optical interface.
Table 5-26 Relationship between the feature code of the AIUQ and the type of optical interface
SS42AIUA01 A01 Ie-1, MT-RJ
SS42AIUA02 A02 2xIe-1/2xS-1.1, MT-RJ
SS42AIUA03 A03 S-1.1, MT-RJ
SS42AIUC01 C01 Ie-1, LC
SS42AIUC02 C02 2xIe-1/2xS-1.1, LC
SS42AIUC03 C03 S-1.1, LC

You can set the parameters for the AIUD/AIUQ by using the T2000.
You can set the following parameters for the AIUD/AIUQ by using the T2000:
l Port type
l Traffic type
l Service type
l Peak cell rate (PCR)
l Sustainable cell rate (SCR)
l Maximum cell burst size
l Cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT)
For the setting of the parameters that need to be set for the AIUD/AIUQ, see 13.3 Data
Boards.
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
The technical specifications of the AIUD/AIUQ include the parameters specified for optical
Table 5-27 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the AIUD/AIUQ.
Table 5-27 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the AIUD/AIUQ
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 155.52 Mbit/s (The SDH frame structure is used and the payload is
ATM services.)
Type of optical
interface
S-1.1 Ie-1 S-1.1 Ie-1
Connector Single-
mode LC
Single-mode
LC
Multi-mode
MT-RJ
Multi-mode MT-RJ
Central
wavelength (nm)
1310 1310 1300 1300
Maximum
transmission
distance (km)
15 2 15 2
Launched optical
power (dBm)
-15 to -8 -19.5 to -14 -15 to -8 -19 to -14
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
-31 -29 -31 -30

The mechanical specifications of the AIUD are as follows:
l Weight: 0.66 kg
The mechanical specifications of the AIUQ are as follows:
l Weight: 0.68 kg
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption of the AIUD at room temperature (25C) is 23 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the AIUQ at room temperature (25C) is 25 W.
5-33
5.5 N64/N64Q/FP2D
technical specifications of the N64/N64Q/FP2D.
The N64/N64Q/FP2D is available in one functional version, namely, SS42.The N64Q/FP2D is
The N64/N64Q/FP2D accesses Nx64 kbit/s services and Framed E1 services.
The N64/N64Q consists of the interface processing module, E1 signal processing module,
mapping/demapping module, logic control module, and power unit.
5.5.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the N64/N64Q/FP2D has interfaces and a bar code.
5.5.5 Valid Slots
The N64/N64Q/FP2D can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3.
You can set the parameters for the N64/N64Q/FP2D by using the T2000.
The technical specifications of the N64/N64Q/FP2D include the parameters specified for
electrical interfaces, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
The N64/N64Q/FP2D is available in one functional version, namely, SS42.The N64Q/FP2D is
The N64/N64Q/FP2D accesses Nx64 kbit/s services and Framed E1 services.
The N64/N64Q is an Nx64 kbit/s interface board.
The N64/N64Q transmits, receives, and processes multi-protocol physical interface services.
The N64 can convert two V.35/V.24/X.21/RS-449/EIA-530 signals and two Framed E1 signals
into E1 signals at the same time, map the E1 signals into VC-4s, and send the VC-4 signals to
the cross-connect unit. The N64 can also consolidate Framed E1 services and Nx64 kbit/s
services, and extract timeslots.
The N64Q can convert four V.35/V.24/X.21/RS-449/EIA-530 signals into E1 signals, map the
E1 signals into VC-4s, and send the VC-4 signals to the cross-connect unit. The N64Q supports
timeslot cross-connection, consolidation of E1 services and Nx64 kbit/s services, and timeslot
extraction. The N64Q also supports Nx2.4 kbit/s subrates, where N is equal to or less than 18.
The FP2D can access Framed E1 services.
Table 5-28Table 5-29 provides the functions and features of the N64/N64Q/FP2D.
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 5-28 Functions and features of the N64/N64Q/FP2D
Function and
Feature
N64/N64Q/FP2D
Basic functions l Supports consolidation of V.35/V.24/X.21/RS-449/EIA-530 signals,
thus saving the transmit bandwidth. You can configure the board on
the U2000.
l Supports the timeslot cross-connection function at the 64 kbit/s level.
l The N64 can consolidate Framed E1 services and Nx64 kbit/s services,
and extract timeslots.
l The N64Q can access Nx64 kbit/s services.
l The FP2D can access Framed E1 services.
Overhead
processing
Processes path overheads, configures 2 Mbit/s or Nx64 kbit/s service
paths, monitors alarms and performance events on the service paths, and
communicates with the SCC unit.
Protection
modes
Supports automatic protection switching.
The FP2D supports the PPS protection.
Maintenance
features
Alarms and
performance
events

Table 5-29 Functions and features of the N64Q/FP2D
Function and
Feature
N64Q/FP2D
Basic functions l Supports consolidation of V.35/V.24/X.21/RS-449/EIA-530 signals,
thus saving the transmit bandwidth. You can configure the board on
the U2000.
l Supports the timeslot cross-connection function at the 64 kbit/s level.
l The N64Q can access Nx64 kbit/s services.
l The FP2D can access Framed E1 services.
Overhead
processing
Processes path overheads, configures 2 Mbit/s or Nx64 kbit/s service
paths, monitors alarms and performance events on the service paths, and
communicates with the SCC unit.
Protection
modes
Supports automatic protection switching.
The FP2D supports the PPS protection.
5-35
Function and
Feature
N64Q/FP2D
Maintenance
features
Alarms and
performance
events

The N64/N64Q consists of the interface processing module, E1 signal processing module,
mapping/demapping module, logic control module, and power unit.
The difference between the N64 and the N64Q lies in the interface module. The interface module
of the N64 is composed of the multi-protocol interface module and the framed E1 processing
module. Therefore, the N64 can process Nx64 kbit/s signals and Framed E1 signals. The interface
module of the N64Q only has the multi-protocol interface module. Therefore, the N64Q can
process only Nx64 kbit/s signals. When N equals a value in the range 1-31, the interface module
inserts a synchronous 64 kbit/s timeslot into a signal, forms a Framed E1 signal, and transparently
transmits the Framed E1 signal. In this case, timeslot cross-connection is allowed. When N equals
32, a signal is transparently transmitted and no timeslot cross-connection is allowed. In this case,
E1 signals can be transmitted.
The interface module of the N64Q only has the multi-protocol interface module. Therefore, the
N64Q can process Nx64 kbit/s signals. When N equals a value in the range 1-31, the interface
module inserts a synchronous 64 kbit/s timeslot into a signal, forms a Framed E1 signal, and
transparently transmits the Framed E1 signal. In this case, timeslot cross-connection is allowed.
When N equals 32, a signal is transparently transmitted and no timeslot cross-connection is
allowed. In this case, E1 signals can be transmitted.
The working principle of the FP2D is similar to the working principle of the N64Q. The interface
module of the FP2D only has the Framed E1 processing module. The FP2D does not have the
processing module or interface for 64 kbit/s services.
Figure 5-13 shows the functional block diagram of the N64N64Q/FP2D.
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Figure 5-13 Functional block diagram of the N64N64Q/FP2D
Framed E1
processing
module
Interface
processing module
64 kbit/s
cross-
connect
module
E1
framing
module
Mapping/
Demapping
module
E1 signal processing module
Cross-connect unit
Clock unit
Two Nx64
kbit/s signals
SCC unit
Logic control
module
Multi-protocol
interface module
5 V
Fuse
5 V
Two Framed
E1 signals
Backplane

The working principle of the FP2D is similar to the working principle of the N64. The FP2D
does not have the processing module or interface for 64 kbit/s services.
Receive Direction
The V.35, V.24, X.21, RS-449, and EIA-530 signals enter the interface processing module for
protocol conversion of Nx64 kbit/s signals and rate conversion of Nx64 kbit/s services and E1
services. In the case of the N64, the Framed E1 processing module performs conversion from
the HDB3 code to the NRZ code to convert the Framed E1 signals into E1 signals.
The E1 signal processing module performs 64 kbit/s cross-connection and E1 framing for the
converted signals. The service processing varies according to the service type and the
configuration requirements.
l In the case of a point-to-point Nx64 kbit/s service of the N64/N64Q, the E1 signal
processing module performs E1 framing for the signal from the interface processing module
and then sends the signal to the mapping/demapping module directly.
l In the case of Nx64 kbit/s services of the N64/N64Q, two or four signals which are to be
consolidated as one E1 signal, the E1 signal processing module consolidates the timeslots
of the signals from the interface processing module, and then sends the E1 signal to the
mapping/demapping module. Note that the sum of N of two or four signals should be not
more than 30.
l In the case of the Nx64 kbit/s service and the Framed E1 service that are accessed by the
N64 at the same time and are to be consolidated for transmission, the E1 signal processing
module performs framing for the signal from the multi-protocol interface module, performs
timeslot cross-connection for both the framed signal and the signal to be consolidated from
the Framed E1 processing module, and finally outputs an E1 signal to the mapping/
demapping module.
The mapping/demapping module converts the E1 signal into a VC-4 signal. Figure 5-14 shows
the mapping process. The VC-4 signal is sent to the cross-connect unit.
5-37
Figure 5-14 Mapping process of the E1 signal
VC-4 VC-3 TUG-2 TU-12
VC-12
C-12
x3 x7 x3
E1

Transmit Direction
The cross-connect unit sends a VC-4 signal to the mapping/demapping module. The mapping/
demapping module demaps the VC-4 signal, extracts the E1 signal, and sends the E1 signal to
the E1 signal processing module. The E1 signal processing module processes the E1 signal
according to the service type and the configuration requirements and sends the signal to the
interface processing module. The N64 outputs the V.35/V.24/X.21/RS-449/EIA-530 signals and
Framed E1 signals. The N64Q outputs the V.35/V.24/X.21/RS-449/EIA-530 signals.
SCB.
Power Unit
5.5.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the N64/N64Q/FP2D has interfaces and a bar code.
Figure 5-15Figure 5-16 shows the front panel of the N64/N64Q/FP2D.
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Figure 5-15 Front panel of the N64/N64Q/FP2D
N64
N64 E1-1/2 DDN2 DDN1
N64Q
N64Q DDN4 DDN3 DDN2 DDN1
FP2D
FP2D
16 1

Figure 5-16 Front panel of the N64Q/FP2D
N64Q
N64Q DDN4 DDN3 DDN2 DDN1
FP2D
FP2D
16 1

Interfaces
The front panel of the N64 has a 2 mm HM connector. The silkscreen on the connector indicates
the types of signals that can be accessed.
l E1-1/2 indicates two interfaces of Framed E1 services.
l DDN2 DDN1 indicates two physical interfaces for V.35/V.24/X.21/RS-449/EIA-530
services.
The front panel of the N64Q has a 2 mm HM connector. The silkscreen DDN4 DDN3 DDN2
DDN1 on the connector indicates four physical interfaces for V.35/V.24/X.21/RS-449/EIA-530
services.
The front panel of the N64Q has a DB78 connector. The silkscreen on the connector indicates
four physical interfaces for V.35/V.24/X.21/RS-449/EIA-530 services.
The front panel of the FP2D has a DB78 connector. The silkscreen on the connector indicates
16 Framed E1 interfaces.
5-39
5.5.5 Valid Slots
The N64/N64Q/FP2D can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3.
You can set the parameters for the N64/N64Q/FP2D by using the T2000.
PDH Interface and Overhead Management
You can set the following PDH interface and overhead management parameters for the N64/
N64Q/FP2D by using the T2000:
l J2
For the setting of the PDH interface and overhead management parameters that need to be set
for the N64/N64Q/FP2D, see 13.2 PDH Boards.
Framed E1 and Serial Port Management
In the case of the N64/FP2D, the Framed E1 interface and serial port management parameters
need to be set. In the case of the N64Q, only the serial port management parameters need to be
set. For the setting methods, refer to Table 5-30 and Table 5-32Table 5-31 and Table 5-33.
Table 5-30 Serial port management parameters that need to be set for the N64/N64Q
Parameter Value
Protocol mode V.35/X.21/V.24/RS449/RS530/
RS530A
Working mode DCE/DTE
Loopback mode Inloop/Outloop/Non-loopback
DDN clock
source
management
Select and configure the following
working clock sources of the N64/
N64Q:
Local 2M system clock/line clock
accessed through port 2M1/line
clock accessed through port 2M5

Table 5-31 Serial port management parameters that need to be set for the N64Q
Parameter Value
Protocol mode V.35/X.21/V.24/RS449/RS530/
RS530A
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Parameter Value
Working mode DCE/DTE
Loopback mode Inloop/Outloop/Non-loopback
DDN clock source
management
Select and configure the following
working clock sources of the
N64Q:
Local 2M system clock/line clock
accessed through port 2M1/line
clock accessed through port 2M5

Table 5-32 Framed E1 interface parameters that need to be set for the N64/FP2D
Parameter Value
Loopback mode Inloop/Outloop/
Non-loopback
Impedance 75 ohms/120
ohms

Table 5-33 Framed E1 interface parameters that need to be set for the FP2D
Parameter Value
Loopback mode Inloop/Outloop/
Non-loopback
Impedance 75 ohms/120
ohms

The technical specifications of the N64/N64Q/FP2D include the parameters specified for
electrical interfaces, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 5-34 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the N64/N64Q/FP2D.
Table 5-34 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the N64/N64Q/FP2D
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate Nx64 kbit/s
5-41
Parameter Value
Interface type N64: V.35, X.21, RS-449, V.24, EIA-530, and Framed E1
N64Q: V.35, X.21, RS-449, V.24, and EIA-530
Standard
compliance
ITU-T V.35, ITU-T V.28, ITU-T V.24, EIA-530, EIA-449, EIA-232,
ITU-T G.703, ITU-T G.704, and ITU-T G.706
Connector type N64/N64Q: 2 mm HM connector
N64Q: DB78
FP2D: DB78

The mechanical specifications of the N64 are as follows:
l Weight: 0.22 kg
The mechanical specifications of the N64Q are as follows:
l Weight: 0.20 kg
The mechanical specifications of the FP2D are as follows:
l Weight: 0.25 kg
Power Consumption
l The maximum power consumption of the N64 at room temperature (25C) is 4 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the N64Q at room temperature (25C) is 5 W.
l The maximum power consumption of the FP2D at room temperature (25C) is 8.4 W.
5.6 SHLQ
technical specifications of the SHLQ.
The SHLQ is available in one functional version, namely, SS42.
The SHLQ converts four G.SHDSL signals into four standard E1 signals, maps the E1 signals
into VC-4s, and sends the VC-4 signals to the cross-connect unit. The SHLQ also processes path
overheads and generates alarm signals on the tributary.
The SHLQ consists of the interface module, 2 Mbit/s signal processing module, mapping/
demapping module, logic control module, and power unit.
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
5.6.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the SHLQ has interfaces and a bar code.
5.6.5 Valid Slots
The SHLQ can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3.
You can set the parameters for the SHLQ by using the T2000.
The technical specifications of the SHLQ include the parameters specified for electrical
The SHLQ is available in one functional version, namely, SS42.
The SHLQ converts four G.SHDSL signals into four standard E1 signals, maps the E1 signals
into VC-4s, and sends the VC-4 signals to the cross-connect unit. The SHLQ also processes path
overheads and generates alarm signals on the tributary.
Table 5-35 provides the functions and features of the SHLQ.
Table 5-35 Functions and features of the SHLQ
Function and
Feature
SHLQ
Basic functions Provides four G.SHDSL interfaces, supports cabling from the front
panel, and uses RJ-11 connectors to connect copper twisted pairs. The
interfaces use two-wire cables.
Long-distance
transmission
Transmits E1 and Nx64 kbit/s data services in the G.SHDSL format, thus
realizing long-distance access of E1 and Nx64 kbit/s signals.
Overhead
processing
Processes path overheads, configures all G.SHDSL service paths,
monitors alarms and performance events on the service paths, and enables
the communication between the service paths and the SCC unit.
Clock source Provides one synchronous clock source.
Protection modes Supports the SNCP switching and bit error protection switching.

The SHLQ consists of the interface module, 2 Mbit/s signal processing module, mapping/
demapping module, logic control module, and power unit.
Figure 5-17 shows the functional block diagram of the SHLQ.
5-43
Figure 5-17 Functional block diagram of the SHLQ
Interface
module
Frame
header
adjusting
module
Mapping/
Demapping
module
Cross-connect unit
Clock unit
G.SHDSL
signals
SCC unit Logic control
module
G.SHDSL
signals
2 Mbit/s signal
processing module
5 V
Fuse
5 V
Frame header
extracting/
inserting
module
Backplane
SHDSL interface
module

Receive Direction
The SHDSL interface module converts the incoming ITU-T G.991.2-compliant G.SHDSL
signals into the 2 Mbit/s code stream that contains the data, clock and frame header. The 2 Mbit/
s signal processing module converts the 2 Mbit/s code stream into the 2 Mbit/s signal that
contains the frame header and sends the 2 Mbit/s signal to the mapping/demapping module,
which maps the 2 Mbit/s signal into a C-12 asynchronously. After the mapping, multiplexing,
and pointer justification process, the signal becomes a VC-4 signal and is sent to the cross-
connect unit.
Transmit Direction
The cross-connect unit sends a VC-4 signal to the mapping/demapping module. The mapping/
demapping module demaps the signal, extracts the 2 Mbit/s signal, and sends the 2 Mbit/s signal
to the 2 Mbit/s signal processing module. The 2 Mbit/s signal processing module extracts the
frame header, processes the 2 Mbit/s signal, and sends the 2 Mbit/s signal to the interface module.
The interface module converts the 2 Mbit/s signal to four G.SHDSL signals and outputs the
G.SHDSL signals.
SCB.
Power Unit
5.6.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the SHLQ has interfaces and a bar code.
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Figure 5-18 shows the front panel of the SHLQ.
Figure 5-18 Front panel of the SHLQ
SHLQ
SHL
Path number identifier
D4 D3 D2 D1
SHLQ interface

Interfaces
The interfaces of the SHLQ are RJ-11 connectors on the front panel. D4-D1 indicate the path
number of the SHDSL interface.
5.6.5 Valid Slots
The SHLQ can be installed in slot IU1, IU2, or IU3.
You can set the parameters for the SHLQ by using the T2000.
PDH Interface and Overhead Management
You can set the following PDH interface and overhead management parameters for the SHLQ
by using the T2000:
l J2
For the setting of the PDH interface and overhead management parameters that need to be set
for the SHLQ, see 13.2 PDH Boards.
DSL Interface
Table 5-36 lists the DSL interface parameters that need to be set for the SHLQ.
Table 5-36 DSL interface parameters that need to be set for the SHLQ
Parameter Value
Working mode E1/V.35
SHDSL frame format G.991.2 ANNEX B/
G.991.2 ANNEX A
5-45
Parameter Value
Activate port Enabled/Disabled
Channel loopback Inloop/Outloop/Non-
loopback

The technical specifications of the SHLQ include the parameters specified for electrical
Table 5-37 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the SHLQ.
Table 5-37 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the SHLQ
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate Nx64 kbit/s and Framed E1
Connector type RJ-11 connector, two-wire twisted pair
distance (km)
3

The mechanical specifications of the SHLQ are as follows:
l Weight: 0.24 kg
Power Consumption
The maximum power consumption of the SHLQ at room temperature (25C) is 10.0 W.
5.7 TDA
technical specifications of the TDA.
The TDA is available in one functional version, namely, SS43.
The TDA multiplexes analog audio signals and low-rate data signals into E1 signals, and maps
the E1 signals into VC-4s. It also performs the reverse process.
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
The TDA consists of the interface processing module, 64 kbit/s cross-connect module, mapping/
demapping module, cross-connect interface module, logic control module, and power unit.
5.7.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the TDA has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.
5.7.5 Valid Slots
The TDA can be installed in slot IU4.
You can set the parameters for the TDA by using the T2000.
The technical specifications of the TDA include the parameters specified for electrical interfaces,
dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
The TDA is available in one functional version, namely, SS43.
The TDA multiplexes analog audio signals and low-rate data signals into E1 signals, and maps
the E1 signals into VC-4s. It also performs the reverse process.
The TDA is a multiple-channel audio and data access board.
The TDA provides two-/four-wire audio interfaces and serial data interfaces to access 64 kbit/
s audio signals and up to 19.2 kbit/s serial data signals.
l Provides four RS-232 interfaces, four RS-422 interfaces, and 12 audio interfaces. The cable
inputs audio and data signals from the front panel by using a 2 mm HM connector and
outputs audio and data signals to the front panel also by using the 2 mm HM connector.
l Provides 12 two-wire audio interfaces or six four-wire audio interfaces or a combination
of two-wire audio interfaces and four-wire audio interfaces.
l The audio interface can be set to an audio interface with power feeding or without power
feeding by using the T2000.
NOTE
The two-wire analog audio interface with -48 V DC power feeding requires the AC impedance of the user
equipment to be approximately 600 ohms. You can use this interface to connect an ordinary telephone.
The two-wire analog audio interface without power feeding also requires the AC impedance of the user
equipment to be approximately 600 ohms. You can use this interface to connect a private line modem.
l The audio interface requires an impedance of approximately 600 ohms and supports a
transmission distance of 4000 meters. The RS-232 interface supports a transmission
distance of not more than 15 meters and the RS-422 interface supports a transmission
distance of 1000 meters.
l Supports inloop and outloop so that services can be tested and faults can be located quickly.
l Supports the SNCP and MSP for services at the VC-12 level.
The TDA consists of the interface processing module, 64 kbit/s cross-connect module, mapping/
demapping module, cross-connect interface module, logic control module, and power unit.
5-47
Figure 5-19 shows the functional block diagram of the TDA.
Figure 5-19 Functional block diagram of the TDA
Data interface
processing module
Interface
processing module
64 kbit/s
cross-
connect
module
Cross-
connect
interface
module
Mapping/
Demapping
module
Cross-connect unit
Clock unit
Audio services
RS-232 signals
SCC unit
Logic control
module
RS-422 signals
5 V
Fuse
5 V
Analog interface
processing module

The TDA consists of the analog interface processing module, data interface processing module,
64 kbit/s cross-connect module, mapping/demapping module, cross-connect interface module,
logic control module, and power unit. These modules are described as follows.
Analog Interface Processing Module
This module implements multiplexing/demultiplexing for analog services and E1 code streams.
The user signal passes the lightning-proof circuit and reaches the PCM coder for A/D conversion.
A program can be designed to control whether to provide the user with power. This module also
performs the reverse process.
Data Interface Processing Module
This module implements multiplexing/demultiplexing for low-rate data service signals and E1
signals. This module converts incoming RS-232 and RS-422 data signals into E1 signals. This
module also performs the reverse process.
64 kbit/s Cross-Connect Module
This module exchanges timeslots for the 64 kbit/s signals following the related requirement and
also exchanges the 64 kbit/s signals over the E1 code stream.
Mapping/Demapping Module
This module realizes mapping/demapping between E1 signals and VC-4 signals.
Cross-Connect Interface Module
This module converts the VC-4 signal from the mapping module into a signal that can be
processed by the cross-connect unit. This module also performs the reverse process.
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
This module decodes each chip-controlled circuit on the TDA, loads the program, and
communicates with the SCB.
Power Unit
5.7.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the TDA has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.
Figure 5-20 shows the front panel of the TDA.
Figure 5-20 Front panel of the TDA
TDA
A-1 A-2 422 232 ALM RUN
Data/Audio interface Board indicators

Indicators
The front panel of the TDA has indicators that show the status of the board. Table 5-38 provides
the meanings of the statuses of the indicators.
Table 5-38 Indicator on the front panel of the TDA
ALM: red alarm
indicator
Flashing three times every
other second
Flashing twice every other
second
Flashing once every other
second
RUN: green running
indicator
Flashing five times every
second
Flashing once every
second
5-49

Interfaces
The front panel of the TDA has a 2 mm HM connector to provide interfaces. The silkscreen "232
422 A-2 A-1" on the connector indicates the type of signal that can be accessed.
Each of "A-1" and "A-2" indicates audio interfaces and can be inserted with one audio cable.
"A-1" indicates the 1-6 audio interfaces and "A-2" indicates 7-12 audio interfaces. Refer to
Table 5-39.
The audio interfaces 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11 can be connected to 2-/4-wire services. When 2-wire
audio services are accessed, a 2-wire telephone line can be inserted in any interface of "A-1"
and "A-2". When 4-wire audio services are accessed, a 4-wire telephone line can be inserted in
interface 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, or 11, and interfaces 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, and 12 must be set to unavailable on
the T2000.
Table 5-39 Mapping relation between the accessed audio signal and the silkscreen
Item Value
A-1 1 2 3 4 5 6
Audio line 1 2 3 4 5 6
A-2 1 2 3 4 5 6
Audio line 7 8 9 10 11 12

"232" indicates an RS-232 data interface. The interface transmits/receives four channels of
RS-232 data through an RS-232 cable. Each channel of signals has Rxd, Txd, and GND.
"422" indicates an RS-422 data interface. The interface transmits/receives four channels of
RS-422 data through an RS-422 cable. Each channel of signals has LT+/LT- and LR+/LR-.
An RS-232/RS-422 cable has four wires of different colors. Refer to Table 5-40.
Table 5-40 Wire color of an RS-232/RS-422 cable and the corresponding signal
Cable Green Red Black White
RS-232 Rxd Txd GND Not defined
RS-422 LR- LR+ LT- LT+

5.7.5 Valid Slots
The TDA can be installed in slot IU4.
You can set the parameters for the TDA by using the T2000.
5 Data Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
You can set the following parameters for the TDA by using the T2000:
l J2
The technical specifications of the TDA include the parameters specified for electrical interfaces,
Table 5-41 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the TDA.
Table 5-41 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the TDA
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate Audio: 64 kbit/s
Digital signal: 19.2 kbit/s
Interface impedance Audio: 600 ohms
distance (m)
l Audio: 4000
l RS-232: 15
l RS-422: 1000
Connector 2 mm HM connector

The mechanical specifications of the TDA are as follows:
l Weight: 0.7 kg
Power Consumption
The maximum power consumption of the TDA at room temperature (25C) is 12.0 W.
5-51
6 SCB
About This Chapter
The SCB is a system control board and is installed in slot SCB. The SCB controls the entire
OptiX 155/622H system and grooms services. Hence, the SCB must be configured for the OptiX
155/622H.
6.1 Version Description
The SCB is available in two functional versions, namely, SS46 and SS49.The SCB is available
in two functional versions, namely, SS43 and SS49.
6.2 Functions and Features
The SCB integrates the functions of the SCC unit, XC unit, STG unit, EOW unit, OI2D/OI4D/
O16DOI2D/OI4D, and SP2D.
6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The SCB consists of the SCC unit, STG unit, EOW unit, line unit, tributary unit, and XC unit.
6.4 DIP Switches
The SCB has the DIP switches that are used to set the running state of the board.
6.5 Front Panel
The front panel of the SCB has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.
6.6 Valid Slots
The SCB can be installed in slot SCB.
6.7 Feature Code
6.8 Parameter Settings
You can set the parameters for the SCB by using the U2000.
The technical specifications of the SCB include the parameters specified for interfaces,
Hardware Description 6 SCB
6-1
The SCB is available in two functional versions, namely, SS46 and SS49.The SCB is available
in two functional versions, namely, SS43 and SS49.
Table 6-1 describes the versions of the SCB.
Table 6-1 Versions of the SCB
Item Description
SS49
Differences The SS46SCB and SS49SCB have different mapping
software versions but have the same functions.
Substitution The versions can be substituted with each other.

Table 6-2 describes the versions of the SCB.
Table 6-2 Versions of the SCB
Item Description
SS49
Differences The SS43SCB and SS49SCB have different mapping
software versions but have the same functions.
Substitution The versions can be substituted with each other.

The software of the SCC unit of the SCB is the NE software. The board software of the line
board and tributary board is integrated with the NE software.
The SCB integrates the functions of the SCC unit, XC unit, STG unit, EOW unit, OI2D/OI4D/
O16DOI2D/OI4D, and SP2D.
Table 6-3 provides the functions and features of the SCB.
6 SCB
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 6-3 Functions and features of the SCB
Function and
Feature
SCB
Cross-connect
capability
l The higher order cross-connect capacity is 21.25 GB and the lower order
cross-connect capacity is 5 GB.
l Supports the cross-connection at the VC-4, VC-3, and VC-12 levels, and
realizes the service grooming between lines, tributaries, and the line and
the tributary.
Line functions l Provides two STM-1/STM-4/STM-16STM-1/STM-4 optical interfaces.
The optical interface supports the hot-pluggable SFP optical module.
l The STM-1 optical interface is named OI2D, the STM-4 optical interface
is named OI4D and the STM-16 optical interface is named OI16D.
l The STM-1 optical interface is named OI2D, the STM-4 optical interface
is named OI4.
l The STM-1 optical interface can be equipped with the optical module of
the S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 type. The STM-1 optical interface uses the SC/
LC connector.
l The STM-4 optical interface can be equipped with the optical module of
the S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2 type. The STM-4 optical interface uses the SC/
LC connector.
l The STM-16 optical interface can be equipped with the optical module
of the S-16.1 type. The STM-16 optical interface uses the LC connector.
l Provides two synchronous timing sources for the clock unit.
l Supports the high-precision time synchronization function to realize the
l Processes section overheads and higher order path overheads.
l Supports the setting of K-byte reporting, K-byte transmitting, and K-byte
passing-through.
l Processes the AU pointer.
l Supports maintenance features such as inloop and outloop on VC-4 paths,
setting of the overhead byte to be sent/received, pass-through test of the
K bytes, and checking of K bytes.
l Supports the MSP and ALS function.
6-3
Function and
Feature
SCB
Tributary
functions
l Accesses 16xE1 signals.
l Maps E1 signals into VC-12s asynchronously.
l Provides 75-ohm unbalanced interfaces and 120-ohm balanced
interfaces. The characteristics of the interfaces meet the requirements
specified in ITU-T G.703.
l Processes VC-12 path overheads, configures all service paths, monitors
alarms and performance events on the service paths, and communicates
with the SCC unit.
l Provides inloop and outloop to test the quality of E1 services or to locate
a fault, thus facilitating the maintenance of the equipment.
l Provides synchronous timing sources for the clock unit.
Clock
functions
l Supports the Non-SSM protocol, standard SSM protocol and extended
SSM protocol.
l Provides the synchronous clock signal for the boards in the system.
l Supports the following working modes: trace mode, holdover mode, and
free-run mode.
l Supports the control of the priority of clock sources.
l Controls the clock source switching function.
l Supports the processing and setting of the S1 byte.
l Provides two 2048 kHz or 2048 kbit/s external clock interfaces whose
impedance is 120 ohms.
Time function l Provides two high-precision time output interfaces. The time
synchronization function complies with IEEE 1588 V2.
l The external time interface supports the output of the 1pps (also called
the second pulse) and the high-precision time information.
l The 1pps interface uses the RS-422 level and the external time serial port
uses the RS-232 level.
l The 1pps interface and the external clock interface use the same interface.
Hence, when the 1pps function is enabled, the external clock function is
invalid.
l The external time serial port and the COM3/COM4 transparent data
interface use the same interface. Hence, when the external time function
is enabled, the transparent data interface function is invalid.
System control
functions
l Exchanges information with other boards, realizes the data configuration
function, and collects performance data and alarm data.
l Provides a standard Ethernet interface and RS-232 data terminal
equipment (DTE) interfaces so that the NMS can manage the equipment.
6 SCB
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Function and
Feature
SCB
Orderwire
functions
l Provides an orderwire interface and supports conference calls and the
broadcast function.
l Provides four RJ-45 RS-232 serial data interfaces and supports point-to-
multipoint connection of equipment to transparently transmit user data.
l Provides 4-input/2-output housekeeping interfaces. The housekeeping
input interface is used to monitor the status of the external equipment and
the housekeeping output interface is used to output alarm indications and
control the external equipment.
Other
functions
l Detects and reports performance events and alarms.
l Provides 18 embedded control channels (ECCs).
l The external clock interface can transparently transmit DCC bytes that
are used to exchange management information when the OptiX
155/622H forms a network with the third-party equipment.
l Generates alarms when the fans are faulty, and manages the fans.

NOTE
The SS46SCB does not support the IEEE 1588 V2 time feature, orderwire phone, or transparent data port.
In addition, slot IU3 does not support ECC communication.
The SCB consists of the SCC unit, STG unit, EOW unit, line unit, tributary unit, and XC unit.
Figure 6-1 shows the functional block diagram of the SCB.
6-5
Figure 6-1 Functional block diagram of the SCB
IU1
IU2
IU3
IU4
SCC unit STG unit EOW unit
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

c
l
o
c
k

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
/
1
p
p
s

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
NM interface
O
r
d
e
r
w
i
r
e

c
a
l
l
H
o
u
s
e
k
e
e
p
i
n
g

d
a
t
a
Debugging serial port
X.25 interface
Tributary
unit
XC unit
Line unit
STM-1/STM-4/
STM-16
E1
F
2

d
a
t
a

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
/
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

t
i
m
e

s
e
r
i
a
l

p
o
r
t

SCC Unit
The SCC unit provides the synchronous equipment management function (SEMF) and message
communication function (MCF). It is important for the system to operate normally.
The SCC unit provides Q and F interfaces for the management of SDH networks, such as the
Ethernet interface and X.25 interface. The SCC unit receives the control and configuration data
of all the units from a computer or a workstation through these interfaces. The SCC unit also
provides DCC communication to communicate with a remote NE.
The SCC unit communicates with other boards of the NE, monitors the alarms and performance
events of the boards, collects the status information about other functional modules, and performs
associated operations accordingly.
The SCC unit provides the function through which NEs communicate with each other through
ECCs.The SCC unit transports the OAM information to other NEs through DCCs, reports the
alarms and performance events of the equipment to the network management terminal, and
responds to the commands issued by the network management terminal.
If the SCC unit fails, the following problems occur:
l Communication failure.
6 SCB
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
In this case, the SCC unit cannot perform the following operations: board management,
alarms and performance events monitoring, status collection for other modules, and other
associated operations.
l DCC failure.
In this case, the SCC unit cannot perform the following operations: transporting OAM
information to other NEs, reporting alarms and performance events to the network
management terminal, and responding to the commands issued by the network management
terminal.
The SCC unit supports the 1+1 MSP, 1:N MSP, and SNCP.
The functions that the SCC unit performs on the packet plane are different from the functions
that the SCC unit performs on the TDM plane.
l TDM plane
The SCB works in independent mode. The network interface of the SCB is enabled and the
network cable needs to be installed on the SCB.
l Packet plane
The SCB works in coordinated mode. The network interface of the SCB is disabled and
the network cable needs to be installed on the CXP.
XC Unit
The XC unit can cross-connect line services with line services, line services with tributary
services, and tributary services with tributary services as the core unit for service allocation. The
higher order cross-connect capacity is 21.25 GB and the lower order cross-connect capacity is
5 GB.
The XC unit can add/drop tributary services and allocate VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 services
flexibly. The XC unit supports the SNCP and path protection, supports the equipment to be
configured as a TM or an ADM, and supports multiple network topologies such as the point-to-
point network, chain network, ring network, intersecting ring network, and hybrid network.
STG Unit
The STG unit phase-locks the external clock source for system synchronization, and provides
the synchronous clock signal for the functional units such as the line board, tributary board, and
external clock interface.
The input and output external clock signals of the STG unit can be 2 MHz signals or 2 Mbit/s
signals. When the external clock interface is used to transparently transmit DCC bytes, the STG
unit needs to be set to the 2 Mbit/s mode.
EOW Unit
The EOW unit realizes partial overhead access (OHA) functions and DCC processing of the
MCF.
The EOW unit provides an external orderwire interface, and supports addressing calls and
conference calls.
The EOW unit also provides four RS-232 transparent data interfaces and the 4-input/2-output
housekeeping interface.
6-7
Line Unit
The line unit accesses 2xSTM-1/STM-4/STM-16STM-1/STM-4 signals and performs serial/
parallel conversion, clock extraction, data restoration, overhead processing, and alarm
monitoring and reporting. The line unit also supports signal inloop and outloop, and supports
the MSP and ALS function.
Tributary Unit
The tributary unit accesses 16xE1 services. The tributary unit consists of the E1 signal interface
circuit, coder/decoder, frame header inserting and extracting module, mapping/demapping
module, and logic control module.
6.4 DIP Switches
The SCB has the DIP switches that are used to set the running state of the board.
Figure 6-2 shows the position of DIP switch SW1 on the SS46SCB.
Figure 6-2 DIP switch on the SS46SCB
SCB
PHONE
1
LOS
2
SYNC 1/2
16
ALM OUT1
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT
ETHERNET
COM2
OUT1
COM3
IN1/2
COM4(F3)
IN3/4
F2
RUN
CRT
RST
1 4
SW1

Figure 6-3 shows the positions of DIP switches SW1 and SW2 on the SS49SCB.
Figure 6-3 DIP switches on the SS49SCB
O
N
SW1
SW2
1
4
3
2
1
3
2
4
ON
ON
Heat sink
ALTERA
MPC8321
SA8500
49SCB

This topic considers the SS49SCB as an example to provide the meanings of the DIP switches
on the SCB.
Table 6-4 describes the DIP switches on the SS49SCB.
6 SCB
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 6-4 DIP switches on the SCB
DIP Switch Function Description
SW1/SW2 To set the running state of the
board
When a DIP switch bit is in
the on position, it indicates
binary value 0.
The DIP switch is a four-bit
DIP switch. The values of the
DIP switch bits are queued in
descending order of the
switch bit numbers. The DIP
switch bit numbered 4 is the
most significant bit.
For details, refer to Table
6-5 and Table 6-6.

Table 6-5 DIP switch SW1
Value Meaning
11xx Indicates that NE software V2 is used.
00xx Indicates that NE software V3 is used.

Table 6-6 DIP switch SW2
Value Meaning
0000 Indicates the running state when the
watchdog is started. It is the default state.
0010 Erases the NE software, NE.ini file, and
extended BIOS of the file system.
0011 Indicates the debugging state when the
watchdog is stopped.
0100 Indicates the running state when the
watchdog is stopped.
0101 Indicates the BIOS hold state.
0111 Indicates the forced independent working
mode.
1010 Erases the data in the system parameter area.
1111 Formats the file system in the flash, erases the
extended BIOS, and erases the data in the
system parameter area.

6-9
6.5 Front Panel
The front panel of the SCB has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.
Figure 6-4 shows the front panel of the SCB by considering the SC optical interface of the
SS49SCB as an example.
Figure 6-4 Front panel of the SCB
SCB
PHONE
RST
RUN
CRT
1
ALM OUT1
LO
S
2
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
ETHERNET
COM2
OUT1
COM3
IN1/2
COM4(F3)
IN3/4
F2
SYNC1/2
16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Table 6-7 Description of the front panel of the SCB
No. Silkscreen Description
1 SYNC 1/2 Indicates a two-input/output external clock
interface. The impedance of the interface is 120
ohms. The interface can be used to transparently
transmit DCC bytes.
This clock interface can also function as the high-
precision synchronization time 1pps interface.
2 16-1 Indicates a 16xE1 interface. The interface uses a
2 mm HM connectorDB78 connector. The
impedance of the interface can be 75 ohms or 120
ohms.
3 RST Indicates a reset button. After the button is
pressed, the SCB is reset.
4 RUN/CRT Indicates equipment status indicators.
5 ETHERNET Indicates an NM interface. The interface uses an
RJ-45 connector at the rate of 10/100 Mbit/s.
6 COM2, ALM OUT1,
MODEM(F)
Indicates a transparent data interface. The
interface is used as a port for the first
housekeeping information output. The interface
can also be used as an interface to connect a local
modem or a remote NMS. The interface uses an
RJ-45 connector.
6 SCB
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
No. Silkscreen Description
COM3, OUT2 Indicates a transparent data interface. The
interface is used as a port for the second
housekeeping information output. The interface is
a debugging serial port and can function as the
synchronization time interface. The interface uses
an RJ-45 connector.
COM4(F3), IN 1/2 Indicates a transparent data interface. The
interface is used as a port for the first and second
housekeeping information inputs. The interface
can function as the synchronization time
interface. The interface uses an RJ-45 connector.
F2, IN 3/4 Indicates a transparent data interface. The
interface is used as a port for the third and fourth
housekeeping information inputs. The interface
uses an RJ-45 connector.
7 1 Indicates the first optical interface. The interface
can be TM-1/STM-4/STM-16TM-1/STM-4.
8 LOS Indicates an optical interface indicator. The upper
alarm indicator indicates the right optical
interface and the lower alarm indicator indicates
the left optical interface.
9 2 Indicates the second optical interface. The
interface can be TM-1/STM-4/STM-16TM-1/
STM-4.
10 PHONE Indicates a two-wire orderwire interface. The
interface uses an RJ-11 connector.

Indicators
The front panel of the SCB has the equipment status indicator, NM interface indicator, data
interface indicator, and optical interface indicator. Table 6-8 provides the meanings of the
statuses of the indicators.
Table 6-8 Indicators on the front panel of the SCB
RUN: green running
indicator
Flashing once every
other second
Flashing once every
four seconds
Database protection mode: The
communication between the board
and the SCC unit is interrupted.
6-11
Flashing five times
every second
Program starting/loading: The board
is not in service.
Flashing twice
every second
The NE software is being erased.
Flashing once every
second
The NE software is not loaded.
On for 3s and off for
3s repeatedly
The board operates normally in
coordinated mode.
2s repeatedly
The board enters the extended BIOS
state in coordinated mode.
CRT: critical alarm
indicator
Constantly off No critical alarm occurs on the
equipment.
Constantly on A critical alarm occurs on the
equipment.
2s repeatedly
ETHERNET: data
transceiving indicator of
the NM interface
(orange)
Constantly on or
flashing
receiving data.
receiving data.
ETHERNET: connection
status indicator of the
NM interface (green)
Constantly on The network cable is correctly
Constantly off The network cable fails to connect to
the interface.
Orange indicator for the
four RJ-45 transparent
data/housekeeping
interfaces
On The transparent data or external time
data is being transmitted.
Off No transparent data or external time
Green indicator for the
data/housekeeping
interfaces
On Housekeeping alarms are input/
output.
Off No housekeeping alarms are input/
output.
LOS: signal indicator on
the optical interface (red)
Constantly on The optical interface does not receive
optical signals.
every second
The received optical power is very
high.
Flashing once every
second
low.
6 SCB
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Flashing once every
three seconds
The optical interface receives the
MS_RDI alarm.
Constantly off The optical interface normally
receives optical signals.

Interfaces
Table 6-9 lists the pin assignments of the SYNC 1/2 external clock interface.
Table 6-9 Pin assignments of the SYNC 1/2 external clock interface
Pin No. Definition Function
1 EXT1R+ Input port for the first external clock
2 EXT1R-
4 EXT1T+ Output port for the first external clock
or the first 1pps
5 EXT1T-
3 EXT2R+ Input port for the second external clock
6 EXT2R-
7 EXT2T+ Output port for the second external
clock or the second 1pps
8 EXT2T-

Table 6-10 lists the pin assignments of the Ethernet NM interface.
Table 6-10 Pin assignments of the Ethernet NM interface
1 ENT_TX+O Connected to the T2000
2 ENT_TX-O
3 ENT_RX+O
4 PGND
5 PGND
6 ENT_RX-O
7 PGND
8 PGND

6-13
Table 6-11 lists the pin assignments of the COM2, ALM OUT1, and MODEM(F) interface.
Table 6-11 Pin assignments of the COM2, ALM OUT1, and MODEM(F) interface
1 RS232_DTR_O For the DTR signal of a modem
2 HDD_RXD0_O For the broadcast transparent port to
receive data (X1 byte)
3 HDD_TXD0_O For the broadcast transparent port to
transmit data (X1 byte)
4 PGND Signal ground
5 RS232_RXD_O For the debugging serial port/X.25
interface to receive data
6 RS232_TXD_O For the debugging serial port/X.25
interface to transmit data
7 K1OUTA For the first housekeeping data output
8 K1OUTB

Table 6-12 lists the pin assignments of the COM3 and OUT2 interface.
Table 6-12 Pin assignments of the COM3 and OUT2 interface
transmit data (X2 byte) or for the first
external time port to transmit data
5 F_RX_O Input of the extended serial port
6 F_TX_O Output of the extended serial port
7 K2OUTA For the second housekeeping data
output
8 K2OUTB

Table 6-13 lists the pin assignments of the COM4(F3) and IN1/2 interface.
6 SCB
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 6-13 Pin assignments of the COM4(F3) and IN1/2 interface
transmit data (X3 byte) or for the
second external time port to transmit
data
5 KGIN_1 For the first housekeeping data input
6 KGINGND_1
7 KGIN_2 For the second housekeeping data input
8 KGINGND_2

Table 6-14 lists the pin assignments of the F2 and IN3/4 interface.
Table 6-14 Pin assignments of the F2 and IN3/4 interface
transmit data (X4 byte)
5 KGIN_3 For the third housekeeping data input
6 KGINGND_3
7 KGIN_4 For the fourth housekeeping data input
8 KGINGND_4

Table 6-15 lists the pin assignments of the PHONE interface.
6-15
Table 6-15 Pin assignments of the PHONE interface
1 NC Not used
2 NC
3 PHONE_AO Orderwire phone interface-A
4 PHONE_BO Orderwire phone interface-B
5 NC Not used
6 NC

The SC optical interface on the front panel of the SCB is used to transmit and receive TM-1/
STM-4/STM-16TM-1/STM-4 optical signals.
6.6 Valid Slots
The SCB can be installed in slot SCB.
6.7 Feature Code
Table 6-16Table 6-17 provides the relationship between the feature code of the SCB and the
Table 6-16 Relationship between the feature code of the SCB and the type of optical interface
Board Feature Code Provided
Service
Interface
Impedance of
the E1
Interface
Type of
Optical
Interface
SS43SCB01 01 - - -
SS46SCBA01 A01 16xE1/2xSTM-
1
75 ohms S-1.1
1
75 ohms L-1.1
1
75 ohms L-1.2
SS46SCBB01 B01 16xE1/2xSTM-
1
120 ohms S-1.1
1
120 ohms L-1.1
6 SCB
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Service
Interface
Impedance of
the E1
Interface
Type of
Optical
Interface
1
120 ohms L-1.2
SS46SCBC01 C01 16xE1/2xSTM-
4
75 ohms S-4.1
4
75 ohms L-4.1
4
75 ohms L-4.2
SS46SCBD01 D01 16xE1/2xSTM-
4
120 ohms S-4.1
4
120 ohms L-4.1
4
120 ohms L-4.2
SS46SCBE01 E01 2xSTM-1 - S-1.1
SS46SCBE02 E02 2xSTM-1 - L-1.2
SS46SCBE03 E03 2xSTM-1 - L-1.1
SS46SCBF01 F01 2xSTM-4 - S-4.1
SS46SCBF02 F02 2xSTM-4 - L-4.1
SS46SCBF03 F03 2xSTM-4 - L-4.2
SS46SCBG01 G01 - - -
1
75 ohms/120
ohms, which
can be set by
using the
jumpers on the
board
S-1.1, SC
1
75 ohms/120
ohms, which
can be set by
using the
jumpers on the
board
L-1.2, SC
6-17
Service
Interface
Impedance of
the E1
Interface
Type of
Optical
Interface
4
75 ohms/120
ohms, which
can be set by
using the
jumpers on the
board
S-4.1, SC
4
75 ohms/120
ohms, which
can be set by
using the
jumpers on the
board
L-4.1, SC
SS49SCBE01 E01 2xSTM-1 - S-1.1, SC
SS49SCBF01 F01 2xSTM-4 - S-4.1, SC
SS49SCBG01 G01 - - -
SS49SCBL01 L01 16xE1/2xSTM-
16
75 ohms/120
ohms, which
can be set by
using the
jumpers on the
board
S-16.1, LC

Table 6-17 Relationship between the feature code of the SCB and the type of optical interface
Service
Interface
Impedance of
the E1
Interface
Type of
Optical
Interface
SS46SCBEA01 EA01 16xE1/2xSTM-
1
75 ohms S-1.1
1
75 ohms L-1.1
1
75 ohms L-1.2
SS46SCBEB01 EB01 16xE1/2xSTM-
1
120 ohms S-1.1
1
120 ohms L-1.1
1
120 ohms L-1.2
6 SCB
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Service
Interface
Impedance of
the E1
Interface
Type of
Optical
Interface
SS46SCBEC01 EC01 16xE1/2xSTM-
4
75 ohms S-4.1
4
75 ohms L-4.1
4
75 ohms L-4.2
SS46SCBED01 ED01 16xE1/2xSTM-
4
120 ohms S-4.1
4
120 ohms L-4.1
4
120 ohms L-4.2
SS46SCBEE01 EE01 2xSTM-1 - S-1.1
SS46SCBEE02 EE02 2xSTM-1 - L-1.2
SS46SCBEE03 EE03 2xSTM-1 - L-1.1
SS46SCBEF01 EF01 2xSTM-4 - S-4.1
SS46SCBEF02 EF02 2xSTM-4 - L-4.1
SS46SCBEF03 EF03 2xSTM-4 - L-4.2
SS46SCBEG01 EG01 - - -
1
120 ohms S-1.1, SC
4
120 ohms S-4.1, SC

You can set the parameters for the SCB by using the U2000.
Table 6-18 lists the parameters that need to be set for the SCB.
6-19
Table 6-18 Parameters that need to be set for the SCB
Parameter Value
Clock source priority In the case of the OptiX 155/622H, you can set the external
clock source, line clock source, tributary clock source, and
internal clock source. Set the clock source priority
depending on the networking.
Clock source reversion
mode
Auto-revertive/Non-revertive
Clock source ID 1-15, None
Orderwire The phone number is 3-8 digits and the call waiting time
is 1-9 seconds.
Broadcast data port Set the broadcast data source and broadcast data sink of
Serial1-Serial4.
Input relay - Using status Unused/Used
Output relay - Use or not Unused/Used
Temperature Set the upper threshold and lower threshold.
Input voltage Set the voltage value, severe overvoltage, severe
undervoltage, common overvoltage, and common
undervoltage of the two power supplies.
Working mode Independent mode/Coordinated mode

The technical specifications of the SCB include the parameters specified for interfaces,
The SCB provides the STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical interface. The STM-1 optical interface
is named OI2D, the STM-4 optical interface is named OI4D, and the STM-16 optical interface
is named OI16D.
l For the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the OI2D, see 3.3.8 Technical
Specifications.
Specifications.
Specifications.
6 SCB
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
The SCB provides the 16xE1 electrical interface. The E1 tributary board is called SP2D. For the
parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the SP2D, see 4.1.7 Technical
Specifications.
The mechanical specifications of the SCB are as follows:
l Weight: 0.8 kg
Power Consumption
The maximum power consumption of the SS49SCB at room temperature (25C) is 21 W.
The maximum power consumption of the SS46SCB at room temperature (25C) is 25 W.
6-21
7 CXP (Packet Plane)CXP
About This Chapter
The CXP transmits the data on the packet plane to realize the smooth evolution from the TDM
plane to the packet plane.
The CXP is available in one functional version, namely, SS48.
The CXP works with the SCB to receive, transmit, process, and transfer FE services and GE
services.
The CXP consists of the PHY interface module, packet switching module, communication and
control module, and power module.
7.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the CXP has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.
7.5 Valid Slots
The CXP can be installed in slot IU4.
You can set the parameters for the CXP by using the U2000.
The technical specifications of the CXP include the parameters specified for interfaces,
Hardware Description 7 CXP (Packet Plane)CXP
7-1
The CXP is available in one functional version, namely, SS48.
The CXP works with the SCB to receive, transmit, process, and transfer FE services and GE
services.
Table 7-1 provides the functions and features of the CXP.
Table 7-1 Functional features of the CXP board
Functional Feature Description
Number of FE electrical interfaces 4
Number of FE optical interfaces 2
Number of GE optical interfaces 4
Connector RJ-45 LC
Interface type 100BASE-TX 100Base-FX,
1000Base-SX/LX/
VX/ZX
Optical module Supports the hot swappable SFP optical
module.
Supports a transmission distance of 500 m, 10
km, 40 km, or 80 km through the optical
interfaces.
Supports the colored optical interface.
Working mode FE electrical
interfaces
Auto-negotiation, 100M full-duplex
FE optical interface 100M full-duplex
GE optical interface Auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex
Interface characteristics l Supports the settings of the MTU at the
Ethernet port.
l Supports the settings of loop mode, query
of port status, query of optical interface
type, and others.
Loopback function l Supports PHY inloop at the Ethernet port.
l Supports MAC outloop at the Ethernet
port.
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Format of service frame Provides the Layer 2 forwarding function.
Supports the frame encapsulation formats
that comply with IEEE 802.1q. Supports a
jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600
bytes.
Ethernet service type l Supports the point-to-point E-line service.
l Supports the multipoint-to-point E-Aggr
service.
QoS Provides powerful QoS capabilities,
including the simple flow classification and
complex flow classification of the VLAN
packet and MPLS packet, and the bandwidth
limit function.
Link aggregation group (LAG) Supports up to 16 LAGs. Each LAG supports
up to eight LAG members.
Protection scheme l Supports the MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1
protection.
l Supports the LAG protection.
Clock function l Supports the synchronous Ethernet clock.
l Supports the IEEE 1888 V2-compliant
time synchronization.
Maintenance features l Supports detection of port faults by
providing alarms and performance events
to facilitate management and maintenance
of the equipment. These alarms and
performance events are related to the
Ethernet interface connection failure,
offline of optical module, installation of an
improper optical module, and shut-down
of laser.
l Supports the hot swapping of optical
module and query of optical module.
l Supports the RMOM counting function.
l Supports the warm reset and cold reset.
MPLS OAM Supports the MPLS OAM that complies with
ITU-T Y.1711.
Number of E-line services 1024
Number of E-Aggr services 4
E1 CES 16
7-3
Number of MPLS tunnels 512 unidirectional MPLS tunnels
Value range: 16 to 32K
Number of static PWs 512
Value range: 16 to 32K
Number of QinQ links 1024
Number of MPLS tunnel 1+1/1:1 protection
groups
128
WARNING
MPLS labels refer to tunnel labels and PW labels. On the OptiX 155/622H, the value of a tunnel label must
be different from the value of a PW label. This is because the tunnel and PW have the same value range
(16 to 32K) and they cannot use the same label at the same time.
On the OptiX 155/622H, the length of an MPLS label is 2K. Thus, the value of the label must be a
consecutive value string ranging from 16 to 32K.

The CXP consists of the PHY interface module, packet switching module, communication and
control module, and power module.
Figure 7-1 shows the functional block diagram of the CXP.
Figure 7-1 Functional block diagram of the CXP
IEEE 1588
protocol
processing
module
Packet
switching
module
Communication and
control module
100/1000 Mbit/s
SCC unit
100/1000 Mbit/s
5 V
5 V
Backplane
PHY
interface
module
Current-limiting protection

Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Receive Direction
The Ethernet data is processed as follows: The Ethernet electrical signals from the port of the
Ethernet equipment (such as the switch or router) are sent to the Delander connector, then to the
transformer, and finally to the PHY chip for decoding. Then, the PHY chip sends 1xGE signals
to the packet switching module.
Transmit Direction
The Ethernet data is processed as follows: GE signals are sent to the packet switching module
for processing. After being converted into parallel signals, the GE signals are sent to the PHY
chip for parallel-to-serial conversion. Finally, the GE signals are sent out.
PHY Interface Module
The PHY interface module performs the following functions:
l Receives and transmits FE signals or GE signals.
l Extracts the synchronous Ethernet clock.
Packet Switching Module
The packet switching module processes the 5 Gbit/s data services in a centralized manner.
E1 CES Processing Module
The E1 CES processing module performs the demapping of E1 services on the bus of the
backplane, PWE3 function, and conversion of GE services into channelized services. Being
connected to the packet switching module through the GE bus, the E1 CES processing module
grooms services with the help of the packet switching module.
The communication and control module performs the synchronous equipment management
function (SEMF) and message communication function (MCF). Therefore, the communication
and control module plays an important role on the packet plane. On the packet plane, the SEMF
function module of the CXP collects alarms and performance events of the other function
modules, transmits OAM information to the other NEs through DCCs, reports alarm data and
performance data of the equipment to the network management terminal, and responds to the
commands issued by the network management terminal. In addition, the communication and
control module provides interfaces used for network management and receives the control and
configuration data of all the units from the NMS installed on a PC or workstation through the
interfaces. The communication and control module also provides the DCC communication
function to communicate with remote NEs.
Power Module
The power module converts the received DC voltage into the DC voltages that the modules of
the board require.
7.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the CXP has indicators, interfaces, and a bar code.
7-5
Figure 7-2 shows the front panel of the CXP.
Figure 7-2 Front panel of the CXP
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
CXP
TEST
STATE
ALM
RUN
ACT
LINK
OMP
1 2 3 4 5 6
RST ETHERNET RSV COM FE
7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
FE FE GE GE GE

Table 7-2 Description of the front panel of the CXP
Silkscreen Description
TEST Reserved for tests.
STATE Indicates the hardware status indicator. For
the meanings of the statuses of the indicator,
see Table 7-3.
ALM Indicates the alarm indicator. For the
meanings of the statuses of the indicator, see
Table 7-3.
RUN Indicates the green running indicator. For the
meanings of the statuses of the indicator, see
Table 7-3.
ACT Indicates the data transceiving indicator of
the Ethernet interface. For the meanings of
the statuses of the indicator, see Table 7-3.
LINK/OMP Indicates the Ethernet connection status and
optical power indicator. For the meanings of
the statuses of the indicator, see Table 7-3.
RST Indicates the reset button. After you press this
button, a warm reset is performed on the CXP.
ETHERNET Indicates the NM interface, which uses the
RJ-45 connector and operates at the rate of
10/100 Mbit/s.
RSV Indicates a reserved interface.
COM Indicates the debugging serial port.
FE Indicates the 100M Ethernet service
interface.
GE Indicates the 1000M Ethernet service
interface.

Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Indicators
The front panel of the CXP has the hardware status indicator, test indicator or deployment test
indicator, running status indicator, alarm indicator, data transceiving indicator of the Ethernet
interface, and Ethernet connection status and optical power indicator. Table 7-3 provides the
meanings of the statuses of the indicators.
Table 7-3 Indicators of the CXP
Indicator State Meaning
STATE: hardware status
indicator
On (green) The board operates normally.
On (red) The board is faulty.
Off The board is not powered on
or not configured with
services.
LM: alarm indicator Off No alarm occurs on the
board.
Flashing thrice every two
seconds
board.
Flashing twice every two
seconds
A major alarm occurs on the
board.
Flashing once every two
seconds
A minor alarm occurs on the
board.
On The board self-check fails.
RUN: green running
indicator
second
Flashing once every four
seconds
Database protection mode:
The communication between
the board and the SCC unit is
interrupted.
second
Program starting/loading:
The board is not in service.
Flashing twice every second The board software is being
erased.
Flashing once every second The board software is not
loaded.
On for 3s and off for 3s
repeatedly
The board operates normally
in coordinated mode.
repeatedly
The board enters the
extended BIOS state in
coordinated mode.
7-7
ACT: data transceiving
indicator of the Ethernet
interface
On or flashing The network interface is
transmitting or receiving
data.
Off The network interface is not
data.
LINK/OMP: Ethernet
connection status and optical
power indicator
On (green) The connection between the
fiber and the interface is
successful. In addition, the
transmit optical power and
receive optical power of the
optical module are normal.
Flashing red thrice every
second (on for 300 ms and off
for 300 ms repeatedly)
The received optical power is
very high.
Flashing red once every
very low.
Flashing yellow thrice every
The launched optical power
is very high.
Flashing yellow once every
is very low.
Off Any of the following states,
including but not limited to,
may occur:
l The optical power is
normal.
l The optical module is not
installed.
l The installed optical
module is incorrect.
l The E2ROM information
about the optical module
cannot be read normally.
l The fiber connection is
disconnected or the
interface is disabled.

Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Interfaces
The front panel of the CXP has the RJ-45 interface and LC interface. The RJ-45 interface is used
to transmit and receive the 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical signals, whereas the LC interface is
used to transmit and receive the 100/1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical signals.
7.5 Valid Slots
The CXP can be installed in slot IU4.
You can set the parameters for the CXP by using the U2000.
The main parameters that need to be set for the CXP are as follows: clock, temperature, and
parameters that need to be set for a data board.
Table 7-4 describes the clock and temperature parameters.
Table 7-4 Clock and temperature parameters
Parameter Description
Clock ID This parameter can be set to an integer in the
range from 1 to 12 or set to null.
Temperature This parameter specifies the upper
temperature threshold and lower temperature
threshold.

For the Ethernet parameters that need to be set for a data board, see 13.3.2 Ethernet
Parameters.
The technical specifications of the CXP include the parameters specified for interfaces,
Table 7-5 lists the parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the CXP.
Table 7-5 Parameters specified for the electrical interfaces of the CXP
Parameter Value
Line code pattern MLT-3 encoding signals (100 Mbit/s)
7-9
Parameter Value
Connector RJ-45 connector
Type of electrical interface 100BASE-TX
Specifications of the electrical interface Complies with IEEE 802.3.

Table 7-6 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the CXP.
Table 7-6 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the CXP
Parameter Value
Nominal bit
rate
100/1000 Mbit/s
Line code
pattern
8B/10B encoding signals
Type of
optical
interface
100BASE-
FX
1000BASE-
SX
1000BASE-
LX
1000BASE-
VX
1000BASE-
ZX
Type of fiber Single-mode
LC
Multi-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Central
wavelength
(nm)
1310 850 1310 1310 1550
Maximum
transmission
distance
(km)
15/2 0.5 10 40 80
Launched
optical
power (dBm)
-15 to -8/-19
to -14
-9.5 to 0 -9 to -3 -4.5 to 0 -2 to +5
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-28/-30 -17 -19 -23 -22
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-7/-14 0 -3 -3 -3

Table 7-7 lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the CXP.
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 7-7 Performance specifications of the GE optical interfaces on the OptiX 155/622H
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 1.25 Gbit/s
Operating wavelength
range (nm)
1471-1611
(dBm)
0-5
Receiver sensitivity
(dBm)
-19
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-3
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
9
Side mode suppression
ratio (dB)
30
Maximum receiver R-
point reflectance (dBm)
-27
distance (km)
80

The mechanical specifications of the CXP are as follows:
l Weight: 1.22 kg
Power Consumption
The maximum power consumption of the CXP at room temperature (25C) is 55 W.
7-11
8 Auxiliary Boards
About This Chapter
This topic describes the auxiliary boards such as the fan boardenvironmental monitoring board
and fan board.
8.1 EMU
technical specifications of the EMU.
8.2 FAN
technical specifications of the FAN.
Hardware Description 8 Auxiliary Boards
8-1
8.1 EMU
technical specifications of the EMU.
The EMU is available in one functional version, namely, SS42.
The EMU is an environmental monitoring board. The EMU must be installed in slot IU3.
The EMU consists of the voltage monitoring module, temperature monitoring module, serial
communication module, housekeeping signal input module, housekeeping signal output module,
and control processing module.
8.1.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the EMU has an interface and a bar code.
8.1.5 Valid Slots
The EMU can be installed only in slot IU3.
You can set the parameters for the EMU by using the T2000.
The technical specifications of the EMU include the dimensions, weight, and power
consumption.
The EMU is available in one functional version, namely, SS42.
The EMU is an environmental monitoring board. The EMU must be installed in slot IU3.
l Provides one RS-232/RS-422 serial communication interface.
l Detects the voltages of two primary power inputs.
l Detects the working temperature inside the equipment.
l Provides 12 housekeeping signal inputs and six housekeeping signal outputs.
The EMU consists of the voltage monitoring module, temperature monitoring module, serial
communication module, housekeeping signal input module, housekeeping signal output module,
and control processing module.
Figure 8-1 shows the functional block diagram of the EMU.
8 Auxiliary Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Figure 8-1 Functional block diagram of the EMU
Control
processing
module
Housekeeping
signal input module
Serial communication
module
Temperature
monitoring module
Voltage monitoring
module
SCC unit
Backplane
Voltage signal
Temperature signal
Serial data signal
Housekeeping signal
Housekeeping signal
output module
Housekeeping signal

Voltage Monitoring Module
This module detects and monitors the working voltage of the equipment. This module can
monitor two voltages at the same time. The T2000 displays and stores the detected voltages. If
the voltage exceeds the preset threshold, an alarm is generated. The voltage threshold can be set
on the T2000.
Temperature Monitoring Module
This module monitors the working temperature of the equipment. The T2000 displays and stores
the detected temperature. If the value exceeds the preset threshold, an alarm is generated. The
temperature threshold can be set on the T2000.
Serial Communication Module
This module provides an external RS-232 or RS-422 interface. You can select the interface type
on the T2000. The default interface type is RS-232. When the interface type is not selected or
the board is restarted, the default value is used.
Housekeeping Signal Input Module
This module inputs external housekeeping signals, up to 12 channels at a time. You can set the
attributes of the input housekeeping signal on the T2000, such as the meaning and the alarm that
the housekeeping signal represents. The status of the input housekeeping signal is displayed on
the T2000.
NOTE
The external housekeeping signal needs to provide only an on-off relation instead of a level. The EMU
provides a circuit to convert the on-off relation into high/low level.
8-3
Housekeeping Signal Output Module
This module outputs housekeeping signals to the external equipment, up to six channels at a
time. You can set the attributes of the housekeeping signal on the T2000. The status of the output
housekeeping signal can also be displayed on the T2000.
NOTE
The output housekeeping signal provides only an on-off relation instead of a level. Therefore, the external
equipment must have the circuit that can convert the on-off relation into the corresponding level.
Control Processing Module
This module provides the board self-check system, loads the board software, processes the
detected data, and communicates with the NE software.
8.1.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the EMU has an interface and a bar code.
Figure 8-2 shows the front panel of the EMU.
Figure 8-2 Front panel of the EMU
EMU
EMU 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7
Voltage
detecting
Housekeeping
signal output
Housekeeping
signal input
Serial port
communication

Interfaces
The interface of the EMU is a 2 mm HM connector on the front panel.
8.1.5 Valid Slots
The EMU can be installed only in slot IU3.
You can set the parameters for the EMU by using the T2000.
Table 8-1 lists the parameters that need to be set for the EMU.
8 Auxiliary Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 8-1 Parameters that need to be set for the EMU
Parameter Value
Input relay - Using status Unused/Used
Output relay - Use or not Unused/Used
Temperature Set the upper threshold and
lower threshold.
Input voltage Set the voltage value, severe
overvoltage, severe
undervoltage, common
overvoltage, and common
undervoltage of the two power
supplies.

The technical specifications of the EMU include the dimensions, weight, and power
consumption.
The mechanical specifications of the EMU are as follows:
l Weight: 0.25 kg
Power Consumption
The maximum power consumption of the EMU at room temperature (25C) is 2.3 W.
8.2 FAN
technical specifications of the FAN.
The FAN is available in twothree functional versions, namely, SS44FA2A, SS45FA2A and
SS42FA2B.
The FAN is used to dissipate heat that is generated by the OptiX 155/622H. This method is
known as the air cooling method.
The FAN consists of the fan unit, control and detecting unit, and power unit.
8.2.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the FAN has an ESD jack.
8-5
8.2.5 Valid Slots
The FAN can only be installed in slot FAN.
The technical specifications of the FAN include the dimensions, weight, power consumption,
and working voltage.
The FAN is available in twothree functional versions, namely, SS44FA2A, SS45FA2A and
SS42FA2B.
Table 8-2 describes the versions of FAN.
Table 8-2 Versions of FAN
Item Description
Functional
versions
SS44FA2A and SS45FA2A SS42FA2B
Differences l The SS44FA2A is supplied with -48 V power.
l The SS44FA2A and SS45FA2A are supplied with -48 V power.
l The SS42FA2B is supplied with +24 V power.
Substitution None

The FAN is used to dissipate heat that is generated by the OptiX 155/622H. This method is
known as the air cooling method.
The FAN also supports the following functions:
l Detecting faults in the fan and reporting alarms
l Hot-swappable function
l Intelligent on/off function (that is, the equipment automatically turns on or off the fans
according to the configured boards)
The FAN consists of the fan unit, control and detecting unit, and power unit.
Figure 8-3 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN.
8 Auxiliary Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Figure 8-3 Functional block diagram of the FAN
Backplane
Fan unit
Control and
detecting unit
Power unit
-48 V
SCC

Power Unit
This unit supplies power to the fan.
Control and Detecting Unit
This unit performs point-to-point communication with the SCC and reports the fan status and
alarms to the SCC.
8.2.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the FAN has an ESD jack.
Figure 8-4 shows the front panel of the FAN.
8-7
Figure 8-4 Front panel of the FAN
FAN

NOTE
One fan board has three fan subracks.
Interfaces
The front panel of the FAN has an ESD jack. You can insert an ESD-preventive wrist strap into
the jack.
8.2.5 Valid Slots
The FAN can only be installed in slot FAN.
The technical specifications of the FAN include the dimensions, weight, power consumption,
and working voltage.
The mechanical specifications of the FAN are as follows:
l Weight: 0.3 kg
Power Consumption
The maximum power consumption of the FAN at room temperature (25C) is 8.3 W.
Working Voltage
The working voltage for the FAN can be -48 V20% DC or +24 V20% DC.
8 Auxiliary Boards
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
9 Power Units
About This Chapter
This topic describes the power units, including the POI/POU, 220 V assembly chassis and UPM
power system.
9.1 POI/POU
technical specifications of the POI/POU.
9.2 UPM
technical specifications of the UPM.
9.3 220 V Assembly Chassis
technical specifications of the 220 V assembly chassis.
Hardware Description 9 Power Units
9-1
9.1 POI/POU
technical specifications of the POI/POU.
The POI/POU is available in two functional versions, namely, SS42POIA and SS42POIB.The
POI/POU is available in three functional versions, namely, SS45POIA and SS45POU01.
The POI/POU is used to access the power supply and to provide the lightning protection function
and filtering function.
The POI/POU consists of the power access unit, lightning-proof unit, and filtering unit.
9.1.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the POI/POU has one power switch and two power interfaces.
9.1.5 Valid Slots
The POI/POU can only be installed in slot POI/POU.
The technical specifications of the POI/POU include the dimensions, weight, power
consumption, and input voltage.
The POI/POU is available in two functional versions, namely, SS42POIA and SS42POIB.The
POI/POU is available in three functional versions, namely, SS45POIA and SS45POU01.
Table 9-1 describes the versions of the POI/POU.
Table 9-1 Versions of the POI/POU
Item Description
Functional
versions
SS42POIASS45POIA SS42POIBSS45POU01
Differences l The SS42POIA is the -48 V power access board.The SS45POIA are -48
V power access boards.
l The SS42POIBSS45POU01 is the +24 V power access board.
Substitution None

The POI/POU is used to access the power supply and to provide the lightning protection function
and filtering function.
Table 9-2 provides the functions and features of the POI/POU.
9 Power Units
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 9-2 Functions and features of the POI/POU
Function and
Feature
POI/POU
Lightning
protection
function
Provides the lightning protection function to prevent a lightning strike
from occurring on the power board.
Filtering
function
Enhances the electromagnetic compatibility of the system by filtering the
power supply interface and shielding the structure of the board.
Power supply
interface
Accesses two -48 V/-60 V or +24 V power inputs.

The POI/POU consists of the power access unit, lightning-proof unit, and filtering unit.
Figure 9-1 shows the functional block diagram of the POI/POU.
Figure 9-1 Functional block diagram of the POI/POU
Backplane
Filtering
unit
Lightning-
proof unit
Power
access
unit

Power Access Unit
This unit accesses two -48 V/-60 V or +24 V power inputs for the system.
Lightning-Proof Unit
This unit protects the equipment from overcurrent and lightning.
Filtering Unit
This unit filters the electromagnetic interference signals to ensure that the equipment can operate
stably.
9.1.4 Front Panel
The front panel of the POI/POU has one power switch and two power interfaces.
9-3
Figure 9-2 shows the front panel of the POI/POU.
Figure 9-2 Front panel of the POI/POU
PGND GND
NEG(-)RTN(+)
NEG(-)RTN(+)
POWER
PGND GND
O
N
O
F
F
O
N
O
F
F
O
F
F

Interfaces
The front panel of the POI/POU has two power interfaces. Table 9-3 describes the interfaces of
the POI/POU.
Table 9-3 Interfaces of the POI/POU
Interface Type of Interface Usage
Power interface 4-core socket Accesses -48 V/-60 V or +24 V power.

9.1.5 Valid Slots
The POI/POU can only be installed in slot POI/POU.
The technical specifications of the POI/POU include the dimensions, weight, power
consumption, and input voltage.
The mechanical specifications of the POI/POU are as follows:
9 Power Units
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
l Weight: 0.15 kg
Power Consumption
The maximum power consumption of the POI/POU at room temperature (25C) is 3.5 W.
Input Voltage
The input voltage range of the POI/POU is as follows:
l If the standard voltage of the input power is -48 V, the power voltage ranges from -38.4 V
to -57.6 V.
l If the standard voltage of the input power is -60 V, the power voltage ranges from -48 V
to -72 V.
l If the standard voltage of the input power is +24 V, the power voltage ranges from +19.2
V to +28.8 V.
9.2 UPM
technical specifications of the UPM.
The centralized administration unit (CAU) of the UPM is available in one functional version,
namely, SS42.
The UPM is a dedicated power system for the OptiX 155/622H. The UPM can directly convert
220 V AC mains into -48 V DC communication voltage that is used by the transmission
equipment. The UPM is suitable for the equipment that does not have -48 V DC power supply
equipment and requires storage batteries.
The UPM is designed as a standard 19-inch structure to facilitate installation. The UPM consists
of the power conversion box from 220 V to -48 V and the storage battery.
9.2.4 Front Panel
This topic describes the front panel of the power conversion box.
9.2.5 Valid Slots
The UPM is in case shape and is an external system. Hence, the UPM does not occupy a slot.
You can set the parameters for the CAU by using the T2000.
The technical specifications of the UPM include the operating voltage, rated current, and
dimensions.
The centralized administration unit (CAU) of the UPM is available in one functional version,
namely, SS42.
9-5
NOTE
The UPM power system consists of the power conversion box and storage batteries. The management
module of the UPM is the CAU. On the T2000, you only need to configure the CAU.
The UPM is a dedicated power system for the OptiX 155/622H. The UPM can directly convert
220 V AC mains into -48 V DC communication voltage that is used by the transmission
equipment. The UPM is suitable for the equipment that does not have -48 V DC power supply
equipment and requires storage batteries.
Dual Hot Backup
The power conversion unit of the UPM adopts the hot backup design by using two AC/DC
rectifier modules. The two rectifier modules can work at the same time and share the load. If
one rectifier module fails, the other rectifier module immediately bears all the load. In this case,
the services running on the OptiX 155/622H are not affected, thus greatly improving the stability
of the system.
Hot-Swappable
The AC/DC rectifier module is hot-swappable. When you replace a faulty rectifier module, the
other rectifier module can still work normally. Therefore, the services running on the equipment
are not affected, thus improving the maintainability of the system.
Storage Battery
The UPM provides the storage battery protection function. When the mains supply is interrupted,
the UPM switches to the storage battery automatically, ensuring that the equipment operates
normally. The storage battery works as follows:
l When the voltage output from the busbar is lower than 450.5 V, the system generates a
critical alarm of DC undervoltage.
l When the output voltage drops to 430.5 V, the battery stops working.
l When the rectifier module is restored and starts to work, the battery connects to the busbar.
The storage battery module can be 12 AH or 20 AH, with which the OptiX 155/622H of standard
configuration can work five to six hours.
Monitoring Function
The UPM integrates the monitoring module and the NM monitoring function. The monitoring
module can monitor and control the parameters and status of the rectifier module, AC/DC power
distribution, and battery groups, and report the data to the T2000 in real time. The storage battery
realizes float charging and current-limiting management.
Loading Capacity
The loading capability of each rectifier module is 250 W. A rectifier module can ensure normal
operation of two fully-configured OptiX 155/622H systems, or four OptiX 155/622H systems
with standard configuration.
9 Power Units
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Easy Installation
The UPM uses the standard 19-inch structure. Hence, it is easy to install the UPM.
The UPM is designed as a standard 19-inch structure to facilitate installation. The UPM consists
of the power conversion box from 220 V to -48 V and the storage battery.
Power Conversion Box
The height of the power conversion box is 1U and the appearance is shown in Figure 9-3.
In the case of standard configuration, the power conversion box has two rectifier modules and
one monitoring module. The storage battery box is optional depending on the requirements of
customers. The dual AC/DC rectifier module realizes hot backup for the UPM. The monitoring
module monitors the power system in real time and reports the monitoring status to the T2000.
Figure 9-3 Appearance of the power conversion box

Storage Battery
The storage battery provides power-down protection for the power conversion system.
The storage battery can be installed in the storage battery box or storage battery pallet. Figure
9-4 shows the appearance of the storage battery box. Figure 9-5 shows the appearance of the
storage battery pallet.
9-7
Figure 9-4 Appearance of the storage battery box

Figure 9-5 Appearance of the storage battery pallet

The UPM is fed by one 220 V AC mains supply. The rectifier module converts the input power
into -48 V DC voltage to provide two DC branches and one battery branch.
Under normal conditions, the rectifier module, storage battery loop, and load loop are under the
control of the monitoring module, which works according to the pre-defined parameters or
settings, and monitors various status and data.
In the case of a mains supply failure, the OptiX 155/622H is fed by the storage battery connected
to the UPM. The battery must be connected to the UPM before the mains supply fails. The UPM
works as follows:
9 Power Units
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
l When the battery starts to discharge due to a mains supply failure, the monitoring unit
reports the alarm of no mains supply.
l With the discharge of batteries, the battery voltage starts to drop. When the battery voltage
is lower than 45 V, the monitoring unit reports the alarm of DC under-voltage.
l When the battery voltage reaches 43 V, the battery initiates power-down protection, that
is, disrupts the connection to the OptiX 155/622H.
l When the mains supply is restored, the UPM resumes normal operations.
9.2.4 Front Panel
This topic describes the front panel of the power conversion box.
Figure 9-6 shows the rear view of the power conversion box.
Figure 9-6 Rear view of the power conversion box
AC100~240
ALM Vout ALM Vout
ALM RUN
RS232
Rectifier module
Communication interface
AC input
Load 1 Load 2
BAT
Battery -
Battery +
Load +
Load -

The "AC input" indicates the AC mains input socket that is used to connect 220 V AC power.
The "Rectifier module" indicates a dual AC/DC rectifier module that converts 220 V AC mains
into -48 V DC power supply. The front panel of each rectifier module has two indicators: ALM
and V
OUT
. There is also a switch on the front panel. Press the switch to enable/disable the rectifier
module.
The "Communication interface" indicates an RS-232 interface, through which the UPM
communicates with the SCB to report alarms and realize remote control.
There are three power output interfaces in the right corner of the front panel of the power
conversion box. The interface at the top is a battery interface, through which the power
9-9
conversion box connects to the battery socket by a battery cable. The two interfaces below are
interfaces for two loads. They supply power for the OptiX 155/622H by using power cables.
NOTE
Slight sparks may occur when a storage battery plug or a load plug is plugged into a socket of the UPM.
DANGER
l Ensure that the battery input interface and the load input interfaces are properly connected.
l When the UPM is powered on, you can add loads. In this case, however, strict measures must
be taken to ensure that the tool and operators are insulated to prevent accidents during
operation.
9.2.5 Valid Slots
The UPM is in case shape and is an external system. Hence, the UPM does not occupy a slot.
You can set the parameters for the CAU by using the T2000.
The management unit of the UPM is the CAU, which is displayed as CAU on the T2000. Table
9-4 lists the parameters that need to be set for the CAU.
Table 9-4 Parameters that need to be set for the CAU
Parameter Value
Number of power modules 0/1/2
Group Battery capacity Set this parameter according to the actual group
battery capacity.
Input number from group battery Set this parameter according to the actual input
number from group battery.

The technical specifications of the UPM include the operating voltage, rated current, and
dimensions.
Table 9-5 lists the technical specifications of the UPM.
Table 9-5 Technical specifications of the UPM
Item Specification
AC input Frequency 47-63 Hz (one single-phase three-wire system)
9 Power Units
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Item Specification
Voltage Operating voltage: 90-264 V AC
Starting voltage: 90-264 V AC
Rated input
current
3.5 A
DC output Rated voltage 54.00.5 V
Rated current 10 A
DC load branch Two, with the total current of not more than 5 A
Storage
battery
Specification A 12 Ah battery group, with the charging current of not
more than 3 A and the fuse of approximately 10 A
Battery
protection
DC under-voltage alarm point: 450.5 V
Protection point: 430.5 V
Battery
management
Float charging voltage: -54.00.5 V
7-30 AH is recommended. When the value is between 7
AH and 17 AH, the power supply is charged by the 1.7 A
to 2 A current. When the value is between 18 AH and 30
AH, the power supply is charged by the 3A5% current.
Regulated voltage precision 1%
Non-balance of load sharing 5% (50%-100% load)
Rated efficiency of equipment 80%
Peak-peak value noise voltage 200 mV
DC voltage drop within the
shield
500 mV (20C)
Electrical network adjustment
rate
0.1%
Dimensions (mm) l Power conversion box: 436 (length) x 240 (width) x 44
(height)
l Storage battery box: 436 (length) x 315 (width) x 133
(height)
l Storage battery pallet: 436 (length) x 173.5 (width) x
125 (height)

9.3 220 V Assembly Chassis
technical specifications of the 220 V assembly chassis.
9-11
The 220 V assembly chassis provides a 110 V/220 V AC power conversion module to directly
access the 110 V/220 V AC power. The 220 V assembly chassis does not use the POI/POU.
The 220 V assembly chassis consists of the power module, MB3 board, MB2C board, ringing
current power module, orderwire unit, fan board, and service processing board.
9.3.3 Front Panel
The power conversion module of the 220 V assembly chassis has indicators, a handle, a power
switch, a power interface, and fans.
9.3.4 Valid Slots
The 220 V assembly chassis is installed in a chassis together with the OptiX 155/622H. Hence,
the 220 V assembly chassis does not occupy a slot.
The technical specifications of the 220 V assembly chassis include the performance
specifications, dimensions, and weight.
The 220 V assembly chassis provides a 110 V/220 V AC power conversion module to directly
access the 110 V/220 V AC power. The 220 V assembly chassis does not use the POI/POU.
Figure 9-7 shows the appearance of the 220 V assembly chassis.
Figure 9-7 Appearance of the 220 V assembly chassis

The power conversion module directly converts 220 V mains power into the required DC voltage
of the equipment. The power conversion module is used when the -48 V DC power is unavailable.
l The power conversion module accesses 110/220 V AC power supply.
l The power conversion module converts 220 V AC mains power into the required DC
voltage of the transmission equipment, with the output power being 170 W.
9 Power Units
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
l The monitoring module is integrated with the power conversion module to monitor and
rectify the power conversion module in real time, monitor the status of the fan, and output
the alarm signal.
l The AC/DC rectifier module is hot swappable. The replacement of a faulty module does
not affect the other module, or the operation of the OptiX 155/622H.
l The power conversion module uses two AC/DC rectifier modules for 1+1 hot backup. The
AC/DC rectifier modules are used for load equalization. If one rectifier module fails, the
other rectifier module takes over all the load without affecting the services on the OptiX
155/622H.
l The power conversion module provides the current-limiting protection, overvoltage
protection, and short circuit protection. The short circuit of a -48 V output does not affect
the normal supply of power.
l The power conversion box is dust-proof and lightning-proof.
The 220 V assembly chassis consists of the power module, MB3 board, MB2C board, ringing
current power module, orderwire unit, fan board, and service processing board.
The equipment is connected to the power supply through the MB3 and MB2C boards in the 220
V assembly chassis. Figure 9-8 shows the system structure of the 220 V assembly chassis.
Figure 9-8 System structure of the 220 V assembly chassis
AC/DC
AC/DC
Orderwire
unit
M
B
3
M
B
2
C
Fan
board
Service
processing
board
Power module
Ringing
current
power
module
75 V AC
-48 V DC
+5 V DC
220 V AC
220 V AC

9.3.3 Front Panel
The power conversion module of the 220 V assembly chassis has indicators, a handle, a power
switch, a power interface, and fans.
Figure 9-9 shows the appearance of the power conversion module.
9-13
Figure 9-9 Appearance of the power conversion module
Indicator
Handle
Power switch
Power interface
Fan

Indicators
The power conversion module has three indicators: PWR, FAN, and ALM. Table 9-6 provides
the meanings of the statuses of the indicators.
Table 9-6 Indicators of the power conversion module
Indicator Color Meaning
PWR Green The indicator is on when the 5 V output and -48 V output
are normal. The indicator is off when an alarm occurs in
either of the outputs.
FAN Green The indicator is on when the two fans work normally. The
indicator is off when one of the fans fails.
ALM Red The indicator is on when the PWR or FAN indicator is off.

Interfaces
Each power module provides a 110 /220 V AC power input interface.
9.3.4 Valid Slots
The 220 V assembly chassis is installed in a chassis together with the OptiX 155/622H. Hence,
the 220 V assembly chassis does not occupy a slot.
The technical specifications of the 220 V assembly chassis include the performance
specifications, dimensions, and weight.
9 Power Units
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Performance Specifications
Table 9-7 lists the technical specifications of the 220 V assembly chassis.
Table 9-7 Technical specifications of the 220 V assembly chassis
Item Specification
AC input Rating input
voltage
110/220 V AC
Input voltage
range
85 V to 264 V AC
Input mode Single-phase three-wire input
Input
frequency
47 Hz to 63 Hz
DC
output
Output voltage -48 V DC +5 V DC
Output voltage
range
-45 V to -60 V DC 4.85 V to 5.20 V
Maximum
load with fan
0.5 A 30 A
Noise 240 mV 50 mV

Table 9-8 lists the technical specifications of the power conversion module.
Table 9-8 Technical specifications of the power conversion module
Item Specification
Input voltage 85 V to 264 V AC
Input voltage
frequency
50 Hz/60 Hz
Input current A maximum of 3.2 A
Input surge current 40 A
Output voltage +5 V DC/-48 V DC
Output power 170 W
Output efficiency 80%
Lightning-proof
requirement
3 kA in the case of the differential mode and 5 kA in the case of the
common mode

9-15
The mechanical specifications of the 220 V assembly chassis are as follows:
l Weight: 13 kg
The mechanical specifications of the power conversion module are as follows:
l Weight: 1.5 kg
9 Power Units
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
10 Fibers and Cables
About This Chapter
This topic describes various types of cables and fibers.
The fibers and cables that the OptiX 155/622H uses are classified as follows:
10.1 Power Cables and Grounding Cables
Power cables and grounding cables are classified into equipment power cables, UPM power
cables, and grounding cables.
10.2 Trunk Cables
The trunk cables include the E1/T1 cable, E3/T3/STM-1 cable, Framed E1 cable, and Nx64 kbit/
s cable, and cables of the TDA.
10.3 Ethernet Cables
Ethernet cables are classified into straight through cables and crossover cables.
10.4 External Clock Cable
The external clock cable is used to receive and transmit external clock signals.
10.5 Transparent Data/Housekeeping Data Cable
The transparent data/housekeeping data cable is used to transmit transparent data and
housekeeping data.
10.6 Fiber Jumper
The fiber jumper is used to connect the equipment to the ODF, connect two pieces of equipment,
or connect the optical interfaces of the equipment.
Hardware Description 10 Fibers and Cables
10-1
10.1 Power Cables and Grounding Cables
Power cables and grounding cables are classified into equipment power cables, UPM power
cables, and grounding cables.
10.1.1 Equipment Power Cables
The equipment power cable is used to connect the power supply of the equipment.
10.1.2 UPM Power Cables
The UPM power cable is used to connect the power supply of the UPM.
10.1.3 Grounding Cables
The grounding cable is used to connect the OptiX 155/622H to the protection ground of the
equipment room.
10.1.1 Equipment Power Cables
The equipment power cable is used to connect the power supply of the equipment.
Structure
A -48 V power cable assembly or a +24 V power cable assembly comprises a power cable and
a BGND cable. The assembly uses a four-pin connector at one end to connect to the power
interface of the equipment. Figure 10-1 shows the structure of the equipment power cable.
Figure 10-1 Structure of the equipment power cable
Stud Main label
W1
Label 2
W2
A
A
A-A
1 3
2 4
Label 1

Technical Specifications
Item Specification
Type UL1015-18AWG
Number of
cores
2
Color l In the case of a -48 V power cable assembly, the -48 V power cable is blue
and the -48 V BGND cable is black.
l In the case of a +24V power cable assembly, the +24 V power cable is red
and the +24 V BGND cable is black.
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Item Specification
Fireproof
class
VW-1

NOTE
The equipment power cable is named in the form of "cable type".
10.1.2 UPM Power Cables
The UPM power cable is used to connect the power supply of the UPM.
Structure
UPM power cables are of three types. Figure 10-2 shows the structure of the AC power cable
from the mains to the UPM.
Figure 10-2 Structure of the AC power cable from the mains to the UPM
Label

When the UPM uses the battery box, the UPM power box is connected to the battery box through
the power cable that is shown in Figure 10-3.
Figure 10-3 Structure of the power cable from the UPM power box to the battery box
Label
W1
W2
X2 X1
A 1
2

When the UPM uses the battery pallet, the UPM power box is connected to the output terminals
of the battery through the power cable that is shown in Figure 10-4.
10-3
Figure 10-4 Structure of the power cable from the UPM power box to the output terminals of
the battery
Main label Label 2
Label 1
Blue
Black
X2
X3
X1
A
View A
View A
A
1
2

Cable Input Power Cable of
the UPM
Power Cable from the
UPM Power Box to the
Battery Box
Power Cable from the UPM Power
Box to the Output Terminals of the
Battery
Type 3-pin
connector-227IEC53
(RVV) 3 x 1.0 mm
2
black-3-pin connector
2-pin-UL1015-18AWG-blue
and black-2-pin-5.08 mm
H2 (5.08)-18UL1015BL +
18UL1015B-2xH1
Number of
cores
3 2 2
Color Black Blue and black Blue and black
Fireproof
class
CM

NOTE
The UPM power cables are named in the form of "Connector type-Cable model-Connector type".
10.1.3 Grounding Cables
The grounding cable is used to connect the OptiX 155/622H to the protection ground of the
equipment room.
Structure
Figure 10-5 shows the structure of the grounding cable.
Figure 10-5 Structure of the grounding cable
Stud Label
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)

Item Specification
Type OT6-4 + OT6-8-UL1015-10AWG
Number of
cores
1
Fireproof
class
VW-1
Color Kelly

NOTE
The grounding cables are named in the form of "Connector type-Cable model-Connector type".
10.2 Trunk Cables
The trunk cables include the E1/T1 cable, E3/T3/STM-1 cable, Framed E1 cable, and Nx64 kbit/
s cable, and cables of the TDA.
10.2.1 75-ohm 2xE1 Cable
The 75-ohm 2xE1 cable uses a 2 mm HM connector to transmit 2xE1 signals.
10.2.3 120/100-ohm 2xE1/T1 Cable
The 120/100-ohm 2xE1/T1 cable comprises a 2 mm HM connector and a cable that has four
twisted pairs. The 120/100-ohm 2xE1/T1 cable transmits 2xE1/T1 signals.
10.2.4 120/100-ohm 4xE1/T1 Cable
The 120/100-ohm 4xE1/T1 cable comprises a 2 mm HM connector and a cable that has eight
10.2.5 75-ohm 8xE1/T1 Cable
The 75-ohm 8xE1/T1 cable uses a DB78 connector to transmit 8xE1/T1 signals.
10.2.6 75-ohm 16xE1/T1 Cable
10.2.7 120-ohm 8xE1/T1 Cable
10.2.8 120-ohm 16xE1/T1 Cable
10.2.9 E3/T3/STM-1 Cable
The E3/T3/STM-1 cable is used to receive and transmit E3/T3/STM-1 signals. The E3/T3/
STM-1 cable uses an SMB connector at one end to connect to the E3/T3/STM-1 electrical access
board. The other end of the E3/T3/STM-1 cable is connected to the DDF. The connector needs
to be prepared on site as required.
10-5
10.2.10 Framed E1 Cable
The Framed E1 cable uses a DB78 connector to transmit 16xFramed E1 signals.
10.2.11 Nx64 kbit/s Cable
The Nx64 kbit/s cables are classified into 10 types according to the protocol type of the accessed
signals.
10.2.12 Cable of the TDA
All the cables used on the TDA are twisted-pair cables using a 2 mm HM connector. The cables
of the TDA are classified into three categories: RS-232 cables, RS-422 cables, and audio cables.
Structure
Figure 10-6 shows the structure of the 75-ohm 2xE1 cable.
Figure 10-6 Structure of the 75-ohm 2xE1 cable
2 mm HM
connector
Main label
Label 1
Label 2
Label 3
Label 4 Label 4
Label 3
Label 2
Label 1
W1
W2
W3
W4
B
B
X
A
View A
a
b
d
c
1234 56
B-B

Pin Assignments
Table 10-1 lists the pin assignments of the 75-ohm 2xE1 cable.
Table 10-1 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm 2xE1 cable
Pin No. of the 2 mm HM
Connector
Coaxial Cable Mark on the Cable Label
a3 Grounding cable T2
a4 Core
a5 Grounding cable T1
a6 Core
d1 Core R2
d2 Grounding cable
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Connector
Coaxial Cable Mark on the Cable Label
d3 Core R1
d4 Grounding cable

Item Specification
Type 75 ohms-2xE1-2.2 mm-(FB4x6)-(4xSYFVZ75-1.2/0.25)
Fireproof class CM

NOTE
The 75-ohm 2xE1 cable is named in the form of "Impedance-Number of E1s-Cable diameter-Connector
type-Cable model".
Structure
Figure 10-7 shows the structure of the 75-ohm 4xE1 cable.
Figure 10-7 Structure of the 75-ohm 4xE1 cable
X
2
3
4
5 6
7
8
1
Main label
View A
View C
2 mm HM
connector
C
W1
B
B
A
2 1 4 3 56
c
a
b
d
B-B

Pin Assignments
Table 10-2 lists the pin assignments of the 75-ohm 4xE1 cable.
10-7
Table 10-2 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm 4xE1 cable
Pin No. of the 2 mm
HM Connector
Cable Mark Labe
l
Pin No. of
the 2 mm
HM
Connector
Cable Mark Label
b1 8 T4 c1 7 R4
a1 d1
a2 6 T3 d2 5 R3
a3 d3
a4 4 T2 d4 3 R2
a5 d5
a6 2 T1 d6 1 R1
b6 c6

Item Specification
Type 75 ohms-4xE1-2.2 mm-(FB4x6)-(4xSYFVZ75-1.2/0.25x8)
Fireproof class CM

NOTE
The 75-ohm 4xE1 cable is named in the form of "Impedance-Number of E1s-Cable diameter-Connector
type-Cable model".
10.2.3 120/100-ohm 2xE1/T1 Cable
The 120/100-ohm 2xE1/T1 cable comprises a 2 mm HM connector and a cable that has four
Structure
Figure 10-8 shows the structure of the 120/100-ohm 2xE1/T1 cable.
Figure 10-8 Structure of the 120/100-ohm 2xE1/T1 cable
X
Main label
View A
2 mm HM
connector
W
A
2 1 4 3 56
c
a
b
d
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)

Pin Assignments
Table 10-3 lists the pin assignments of the 120/100-ohm 2xE1/T1 cable.
Table 10-3 Pin assignments of the 120/100-ohm 2xE1/T1 cable
Connector
Twisted-Pair Cable Label
a3 White T2
a4 Brown
a5 White T1
a6 Green
d1 White R2
d2 Orange
d3 White R1
d4 Blue
d6 Grounding cable

Item Specification
Type 120 ohms-2xE1-0.4mm-(FB4x6)-(120CC4P0.4P430U)
Fireproof
class
CM

NOTE
The 120/100-ohm 2xE1/T1 cable is named in the form of "Impedance-Number of E1s-Cable diameter-
Connector type-Cable model".
10.2.4 120/100-ohm 4xE1/T1 Cable
The 120/100-ohm 4xE1/T1 cable comprises a 2 mm HM connector and a cable that has eight
Structure
Figure 10-9 shows the structure of the 120/100-ohm 4xE1/T1 cable.
10-9
Figure 10-9 Structure of the 120/100-ohm 4xE1/T1 cable
Main label
2 mm HM
connector
W1
W2
X
A
View A
2 1 4 3 56
c
a
b
d

Pin Assignments
Table 10-4 lists the pin assignments of the 120/100-ohm 4xE1/T1 cable.
Table 10-4 Pin assignments of the 120/100-ohm 4xE1/T1 cable
Pin No. of the 2 mm
HM Connector
W1 Label Pin No. of the 2 mm
HM Connector
W2 Label
b1 Red T4 c1 White R4
a1 Green d1 Brown
a2 Red T3 d2 White R3
a3 Orange d3 Green
a4 Red T2 d4 White R2
a5 Blue d5 Orange
a6 White T1 d6 White R1
b6 Gray c6 Blue

Item Specification
Type 120 ohms-4xE1-0.4mm-(FB4x6)-(120CC8P0.4P430U)
Fireproof
class
CM

NOTE
The 120/100-ohm 4xE1/T1 cable is named in the form of "Impedance-Number of E1s-Cable diameter-
10.2.5 75-ohm 8xE1/T1 Cable
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Structure
Figure 10-10 shows the structure of the 75-ohm 8xE1/T1 cable.
Figure 10-10 Structure of the 75-ohm 8xE1/T1 cable

Pin Assignments
Table 10-5 lists the pin assignments of the 75-ohm 8xE1/T1 cable.
Table 10-5 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm 8xE1/T1 cable
Cable Pin Signal No. Remark
s
s
W1 2 Blue 1 R1 W2 6 Blue 1 R5
22 White 26 White
41 Orange 2 T1 45 Orange 2 T5
61 White 65 White
3 Green 3 R2 7 Green 3 R6
23 White 27 White
42 Brown 4 T2 46 Brown 4 T6
62 White 66 White
4 Grey 5 R3 8 Grey 5 R7
24 White 28 White
43 Blue 6 T3 47 Blue 6 T7
10-11
s
s
63 Red 67 Red
5 Orange 7 R4 59 Orange 7 R8
25 Red 29 Red
44 Green 8 T4 48 Green 8 T8
64 Red 68 Red

Item Specification
Type 75 ohms-8xE1-0.5 mm-(DB78 Male)-(2xSYFVZP75-1.2/0.25x8(S))
Fireproof
class
CM

NOTE
The 75-ohm 8xE1/T1 cable is named in the form of "Impedance-Number of E1s-Cable diameter-Connector
type-Cable model".
10.2.6 75-ohm 16xE1/T1 Cable
Structure
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)

Pin Assignments
s
s
W1 2 Tip 1 R1 W2 4 Tip 1 R5
2 Ring 24 Ring
31 Tip 2 T1 33 Tip 2 T5
12 Ring 14 Ring
41 Tip 3 R2 43 Tip 3 R6
61 Ring 63 Ring
70 Tip 4 T2 72 Tip 4 T6
51 Ring 53 Ring
3 Tip 5 R3 5 Tip 5 R7
23 Ring 25 Ring
32 Tip 6 T3 34 Tip 6 T7
13 Ring 15 Ring
42 Tip 7 R4 44 Tip 7 R8
62 Ring 64 Ring
71 Tip 8 T4 73 Tip 8 T8
52 Ring 54 Ring
W3 6 Tip 1 R9 W4 8 Tip 1 R13
26 Ring 28 Ring
35 Tip 2 T9 37 Tip 2 T13
16 Ring 18 Ring
45 Tip 3 R10 47 Tip 3 R14
65 Ring 67 Ring
74 Tip 4 T10 76 Tip 4 T14
55 Ring 57 Ring
7 Tip 5 R11 9 Tip 5 R15
10-13
s
s
27 Ring 29 Ring
36 Tip 6 T11 38 Tip 6 T15
17 Ring 19 Ring
46 Tip 7 R12 48 Tip 7 R16
66 Ring 68 Ring
75 Tip 8 T12 77 Tip 8 T16
56 Ring 58 Ring

Item Specification
Type 75 ohms-16xE1-0.5 mm-(DB78 Male)-(4xSYFVZP75-1.2/0.25x8(S))
Fireproof
class
CM

NOTE
The 75-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable is named in the form of "Impedance-Number of E1s-Cable diameter-
10.2.7 120-ohm 8xE1/T1 Cable
Structure
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)

Pin Assignments
s
s
22 White 26 White
61 White 65 White
23 White 27 White
62 White 66 White
24 White 28 White
63 Red 67 Red
25 Red 29 Red
10-15
s
s
64 Red 68 Red

Item Specification
Type 120 ohms-8xE1-0.5 mm-(DB78 Male)-(2x120CC8P0.5P430U(S))
Fireproof
class
CM

NOTE
10.2.8 120-ohm 16xE1/T1 Cable
Structure

Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Pin Assignments
s
s
22 White 26 White
61 White 65 White
23 White 27 White
62 White 66 White
24 White 28 White
63 Red 67 Red
25 Red 29 Red
64 Red 68 Red
W3 31 Blue 1 R9 W4 35 Blue 1 R13
12 White 16 White
51 White 55 White
13 White 17 White
52 White 56 White
33 Grey 5 R11 37 Grey 5 R15
14 White 18 White
10-17
s
s
72 Blue 6 T11 76 Blue 6 T15
53 Red 57 Red
15 Red 19 Red
54 Red 58 Red

Item Specification
Type 120 ohms-16xE1-0.5 mm-(DB78 Male)-(4x120CC8P0.5P430U(S))
Fireproof
class
CM

NOTE
10.2.9 E3/T3/STM-1 Cable
The E3/T3/STM-1 cable is used to receive and transmit E3/T3/STM-1 signals. The E3/T3/
STM-1 cable uses an SMB connector at one end to connect to the E3/T3/STM-1 electrical access
board. The other end of the E3/T3/STM-1 cable is connected to the DDF. The connector needs
to be prepared on site as required.
Structure
Figure 10-14 shows the structure of the E3/T3/STM-1 cable.
Figure 10-14 Structure of the E3/T3/STM-1 cable
Interface Label

Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Item Specification
Type 75 ohms-3.9 mm-(SMB75 straight female connector-IV)-(SYV75-2/0.34
(s))
Fireproof
class
VW-1

NOTE
The E3/T3/STM-1 cable is named in the form of "Impedance-Cable diameter-Connector type-Cable
model".
10.2.10 Framed E1 Cable
The Framed E1 cable uses a DB78 connector to transmit 16xFramed E1 signals.
The Framed E1 cables are of two types: 75-ohm Framed E1 cables and 120-ohm Framed E1
cables. Figure 10-15 shows the structure of the Framed E1 cable.
Figure 10-15 Structure of the Framed E1 cable
Metal screw
Main label
W1 to W4
X1

Figure 10-16 Pins of the DB78 connector
1
21
40
60
20
39
59
78

10-19
Pin Assignments of the 75-ohm Framed E1 Cable
Table 10-9 lists the pin assignments of the 75-ohm Framed E1 cable.
Table 10-9 Pin assignments of the 75-ohm Framed E1 cable
Cable Pin
No.
Wire Serial No. Remarks Cable Pin
No.
Wire Serial
No.
Remarks
W1 2 Tip 1 R1 W2 4 Tip 1 R5
22 Ring 24 Ring
31 Tip 2 T1 33 Tip 2 T5
12 Ring 14 Ring
41 Tip 3 R2 43 Tip 3 R6
61 Ring 63 Ring
70 Tip 4 T2 72 Tip 4 T6
51 Ring 53 Ring
3 Tip 5 R3 5 Tip 5 R7
23 Ring 25 Ring
32 Tip 6 T3 34 Tip 6 T7
13 Ring 15 Ring
42 Tip 7 R4 44 Tip 7 R8
62 Ring 64 Ring
71 Tip 8 T4 73 Tip 8 T8
52 Ring 54 Ring
W3 6 Tip 1 R9 W4 8 Tip 1 R13
26 Ring 28 Ring
35 Tip 2 T9 37 Tip 2 T13
16 Ring 18 Ring
45 Tip 3 R10 47 Tip 3 R14
65 Ring 67 Ring
74 Tip 4 T10 76 Tip 4 T14
55 Ring 57 Ring
7 Tip 5 R11 9 Tip 5 R15
27 Ring 29 Ring
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Cable Pin
No.
Wire Serial No. Remarks Cable Pin
No.
Wire Serial
No.
Remarks
36 Tip 6 T11 38 Tip 6 T15
17 Ring 19 Ring
46 Tip 7 R12 48 Tip 7 R16
66 Ring 68 Ring
75 Tip 8 T12 77 Tip 8 T16
56 Ring 58 Ring

Pin Assignments of the 120-ohm Framed E1 Cable
Table 10-10 lists the pin assignments of the 120-ohm Framed E1 cable.
Table 10-10 Pin assignments of the 120-ohm Framed E1 cable
Cable Pin
No.
Color Serial
No.
Remark
s
Cable Pin
No.
Color Serial
No.
Remarks
22 White 26 White
61 White 65 White
23 White 27 White
42 Brown 4 R4 46 Brown 4 R12
62 White 66 White
24 White 28 White
43 Blue 6 R6 47 Blue 6 R14
63 Red 67 Red
25 Red 29 Red
64 Red 68 Red
W3 31 Blue 1 T1 W4 35 Blue 1 T9
10-21
Cable Pin
No.
Color Serial
No.
Remark
s
Cable Pin
No.
Color Serial
No.
Remarks
12 White 16 White
51 White 55 White
13 White 17 White
52 White 56 White
33 Grey 5 T5 37 Grey 5 T13
14 White 18 White
72 Blue 6 T6 76 Blue 6 T14
53 Red 57 Red
15 Red 19 Red
54 Red 58 Red

10.2.11 Nx64 kbit/s Cable
The Nx64 kbit/s cables are classified into 10 types according to the protocol type of the accessed
signals.
V.35 DCE Cable
The V.35 DCE cable uses a dark blue 18-core 28AWG shielded twisted pair communication
cable. Figure 10-17 shows the structure of the V.35 DCE cable.
Figure 10-17 Structure of the V.35 DCE cable used on the N64/N64Q
V.35 female pin
Main label
2 mm FB
connector
View A
X1
X2
B A
View B
2 1 4 3 56
c
a
b
d
Type-D 34-pin cable connector,
V.35 DCE connector suite
(shell in dark blue)
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)

V.35 DTE Cable
The V.35 DTE cable uses a 9-pair 28AWG communications cable with aluminum foil and copper
braid. Figure 10-18 shows the structure of the V.35 DTE cable.
Figure 10-18 Structure of the V.35 DTE cable used on theN64/N64Q
2 mm FB
connector
X1
X2
View B
2 1 4 3 56
c
a
b
d
V.35 male pin
View A
A
B
Type-D 34-pin cable connector,
V.35 DCE male connector
(shell in dark blue)

V.24 DCE Cable
The V.24 DCE cable uses a 100-ohm 26AWG communication cable. Figure 10-19 shows the
structure of the V.24 DCE cable.
Type-D 25-pin cable
connector, female
Main label
2 mm FB
connector
1
25
View A
X1
X2
View B
2 1 4 3 56
c
a
b
d
B
A

V.24 DTE Cable
The V.24 DTE cable uses a 100-ohm 26AWG communication cable. Figure 10-20 shows the
structure of the V.24 DTE cable.
10-23
Figure 10-20 Structure of the V.24 DTE cable used on the N64/N64Q
Type-D 25-pin cable
connector, male
2 mm FB
connector
1
25
View A
X1
X2
View B
2 1 4 3 56
c
a
b
d
B
A
Main label

X.21 DCE Cable
The X.21 DCE cable uses a 100-ohm 26AWG communication cable. Figure 10-21 shows the
structure of the V.21 DCE cable.
1
15
Main label
X1
X2
View B
2 1 4 3 56
c
a
b
d
B
A
2 mm FB
connector
View A
Type-D 15-pin cable
connector, female

X.21 DTE Cable
The X.21 DTE cable uses a 100-ohm 26AWG communication cable. Figure 10-22 shows the
structure of the V.21 DTE cable.
Figure 10-22 Structure of the V.21 DTE cable used on the N64/N64Q
1
15
Main label
X1
X2
View B
2 1 4 3 56
c
a
b
d
B
A
2 mm FB
connector
View A
Type-D 15-pin cable
connector, male

Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
RS-449 DCE Cable
The RS-449 DCE cable uses a 100-ohm 12-pair 28AWG communication cable. Figure 10-23
shows the structure of the RS-449 DCE cable.
Figure 10-23 Structure of the RS-449 DCE cable used on the N64/N64Q
Main label
37
1
X2
X1
View A
A
2 mm FB
connector
View B
2 1 4 3 56
c
a
b
d
B
Type-D 37-pin cable
connector, female

RS-449 DTE Cable
The RS-449 DTE cable uses a 100-ohm 12-pair 28AWG communication cable. Figure 10-24
shows the structure of the RS-449 DTE cable.
Figure 10-24 Structure of the RS-449 DTE cable used on the N64/N64Q
Main label
37
1
X2
X1
View A
A
2 mm FB
connector
View B
2 1 4 3 56
c
a
b
d
B
Type-D 37-pin cable
connector, male

EIA-530 DCE Cable
The EIA-530 DCE cable uses a 100-ohm 12-pair 28AWG communication cable. Figure
10-25 shows the structure of the EIA-530 DCE cable.
10-25
Figure 10-25 Structure of the EIA-530 DCE cable used on the N64/N64Q
Main label
2 mm FB
connector
1
25
View A
X1
X2
View B
2 1 4 3 56
c
a
b
d
B
A
Type-D 25-pin cable
connector, female

EIA-530 DTE Cable
The EIA-530 DTE cable uses a 100-ohm 12-pair 28AWG communication cable. Figure
10-26 shows the structure of the EIA-530 DTE cable.
Figure 10-26 Structure of the EIA-530 DTE cable used on the N64/N64Q
Main label
2 mm FB
connector
1
25
View A
X1
X2
View B
2 1 4 3 56
c
a
b
d
B
A
Type-D 25-pin cable
connector, male

10.2.12 Cable of the TDA
All the cables used on the TDA are twisted-pair cables using a 2 mm HM connector. The cables
of the TDA are classified into three categories: RS-232 cables, RS-422 cables, and audio cables.
RS-232 Cable
The RS-232 cable is a 4-core cable using a 2 mm HM connector. Figure 10-27 shows the
structure of the RS-232 cable.
Figure 10-27 Structure of the RS-232 (RS-422) cable of the TDA
Label 1 2 mm HM connector
W1
W2
W3
W4
View A
c
a
b
d
2 1 4 3 5 6
A
Label 4
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)

Table 10-11 lists the pin assignments of the RS-232 cable.
Table 10-11 Pin assignments of the RS-232 cable of the TDA
Connector
Cable Label
d2 Green W1 RS-232-4
b2 Red
c2 Black
b3 Red
c3 Black
b4 Red
c4 Black
b5 Red
c5 Black

RS-422 Cable
The RS-422 cable is a four-core cable using a 2 mm HM connector. Figure 10-27 shows the
structure of the RS-422 cable. Table 10-12 lists the pin assignments of the RS-422 cable.
Table 10-12 Pin assignments of the RS-422 cable of the TDA
Connector
Cable Label
d2 Red
d5 Black
d6 White
c1 Green W2 RS-422-2
c2 Red
c5 Black
10-27
Connector
Cable Label
c6 White
b1 Green W3 RS-422-3
b2 Red
b5 Black
b6 White
a1 Green W4 RS-422-4
a2 Red
a5 Black
a6 White

Audio Cable
The audio cable is a 16-core cable using a 2 mm HM connector. Figure 10-28 shows the structure
of the audio cable. Table 10-13 lists the pin assignments of the audio cable.
Figure 10-28 Structure of the audio cable of the TDA
A
View A
c
a
b
d
2 1 4 3 56
2 mm HM connector
Label 1
Label 6

Table 10-13 Pin assignments of the audio cable of the TDA
Connector
Remarks Label
c1 Twisted-pair A-6
a1
c2 Twisted-pair A-5
a2
c3 Twisted-pair A-4
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Connector
Remarks Label
a3
c4 Twisted-pair A-3
a4
c5 Twisted-pair A-2
a5
c6 Twisted-pair A-1
a6

10.3 Ethernet Cables
Ethernet cables are classified into straight through cables and crossover cables.
10.3.1 Straight Through Cable
The straight through cable uses an RJ-45 connector at both ends and is used to connect the OptiX
155/622H to an NM computer through a hub.
10.3.2 Crossover Cable
The crossover cable uses an RJ-45 connector at both ends and is used to directly connect the
OptiX 155/622H to an NM computer.
10.3.1 Straight Through Cable
The straight through cable uses an RJ-45 connector at both ends and is used to connect the OptiX
155/622H to an NM computer through a hub.
The straight through cable is used in the following situations:
l Connecting the OptiX 155/622H to a hub
l Connecting a hub to an NM computer
l Connecting an Ethernet interface board to the Ethernet equipment
Structure
Figure 10-29 shows the structure of the straight through cable.
Figure 10-29 Structure of the straight through cable
Network interface
connector, RJ-45
Main label
1
8
X2
X1
Label 2
Label 1
10-29

Pin Assignments
Table 10-14 lists the pin assignments of the straight through cable.
Table 10-14 Pin assignments of the straight through cable
Connector X1 Connector
X2
Color Relation
X1.2 X2.2 Orange Pair
X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange
X1.6 X2.6 Green Pair
X1.3 X2.3 White/Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Pair
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.8 X2.8 Brown Pair
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown

Item Specification
Connector X1 Network interface connector-RJ-45 connector-8 pins-8 bits-shielded-
connector-24 to 26 AWG-CAT 6/configured with the SFTP network
cable
Type Communication cable-10015 ohms-shielded enhanced category 5-
CAT5E SFTP 24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 445U
Number of cores 8
Fireproof class CM

NOTE
The straight through cable is named in the form of "Cable type-Impedance-Model-Cable diameter-Skin
color".
10.3.2 Crossover Cable
The crossover cable uses an RJ-45 connector at both ends and is used to directly connect the
OptiX 155/622H to an NM computer.
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Structure
Figure 10-30 shows the structure of the crossover cable.
Figure 10-30 Structure of the crossover cable
Main
label
Network
cable
1
8
X1 X2
1
8
Label 1 Label 2
Network interface
connector, RJ-45

Pin Assignments
Table 10-15 lists the pin assignments of the crossover cable.
Table 10-15 Pin assignments of the crossover cable
Connector
X1
Connector X2 Color Relation
X1.6 X2.2 Orange Pair
X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange
X1.2 X2.6 Green Pair
X1.1 X2.3 White/Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Pair
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.8 X2.8 Brown Pair
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown

Table 10-16 lists the technical specifications of the crossover cable.
Table 10-16 Technical specifications of the crossover cable
Item Specification
Connector X1/
X2
Network interface connector-RJ-45 connector-8 pins-8 bits-shielded-
connector-24 to 26 AWG-CAT 6/configured with the SFTP network cable
10-31
Item Specification
Type Communication cable-10015 ohms-shielded enhanced category 5-
CAT5E SFTP 24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 646U
Number of cores 8
Fireproof class CM

NOTE
The crossover cable is named in the form of "Cable type-Impedance-Model-Cable diameter-Skin color".
10.4 External Clock Cable
The external clock cable is used to receive and transmit external clock signals.
The impedance of the external clock cable is 120 ohms. The external clock cable uses an RJ-45
connector at one end to connect to the external clock input/output interface of the SCB, and uses
another connector (the type of connector depends on the situations of the site) to connect to the
external equipment.
NOTE
The 1pps interface and the external clock interface use the same interface. Hence, the 1pps interface cable
and the external clock cable use the same cable. When the 1pps function is enabled, however, the external
clock function is invalid.
Structure
Figure 10-31 shows the structure of the external clock cable.
Figure 10-31 Structure of the external clock cable
View A
8
1
X1
Main label
Network interface
connector, RJ-45

Pin Assignments
The external clock cable connects to the SYNC 1/2 external clock interface of the SCB. When
you install the external clock cable, refer to the description of the front panel of the SCB.
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 10-17 lists the technical specifications of the external clock cable.
Table 10-17 Technical specifications of the external clock cable
Item Specification
Connector
X1
Network interface connector-8 pins-8 bits-shielded-RJ-45 connector
Type Eight-pin connector-IV-120CC4P0.5P430U(S)
Number of
cores
8
Fireproof
class
CM

NOTE
The external clock cable is named in the form of "Connector type-Cable model".
10.5 Transparent Data/Housekeeping Data Cable
The transparent data/housekeeping data cable is used to transmit transparent data and
housekeeping data.
The transparent data/housekeeping data cable uses an RJ-45 connector at one end to connect to
the transparent data/housekeeping data interface and uses another connector at the other end to
connect to the external equipment or centered alarm monitoring equipment (the type of connector
depends on the situations of the site).
NOTE
The external time serial port and the COM3/COM4 transparent data interface use the same interface. Hence,
the external time serial port cable and the transparent data cable use the same cable. When the external
time function is enabled, however, the transparent data interface function is invalid.
Structure
Figure 10-32 shows the structure of the transparent data/housekeeping data cable.
Figure 10-32 Structure of the transparent data/housekeeping data cable
View A
8
1
X1
Main label
Network interface
connector, RJ-45
10-33

Pin Assignments
The transparent data/housekeeping data cable connects to the transparent data/housekeeping
data interface. When you install the transparent data/housekeeping data cable, refer to the
description of the four transparent data/housekeeping interfaces of the SCB.
Table 10-18 lists the technical specifications of the transparent data/housekeeping data cable.
Table 10-18 Technical specifications of the transparent data/housekeeping data cable
Item Specification
Connector
X1
Network interface connector-8 pins-8 bits-shielded-RJ-45 connector
Type Eight-pin connector-IV-120CC4P0.5P430U(S)
Number of
cores
8
Fireproof
class
CM

NOTE
The transparent data/housekeeping data cable is named in the form of "Connector type-Cable model".
10.6 Fiber Jumper
The fiber jumper is used to connect the equipment to the ODF, connect two pieces of equipment,
or connect the optical interfaces of the equipment.
According to the type of connector, the fiber jumpers of the OptiX 155/622H are classified into
the following types: SC, FC, and LC. According to the type of fiber, the fiber jumpers are
classified into 2 mm single-mode fiber jumpers and 2 mm multi-mode fiber jumpers.
CAUTION
Multi-mode optical transmit modules must be connected to multi-mode fiber jumpers, and
single-mode optical transmit modules must be connected to single-mode fiber jumpers.
SC Fiber Jumpers
An SC fiber jumper uses a square connector, as shown in Figure 10-33.
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Figure 10-33 SC fiber jumper
Protective cap
SC connector

To insert an SC fiber jumper, align it with the optical interface and use appropriate force to push
it in until you hear a click.
To remove the SC fiber jumper, use the fiber jumper remover.
FC Fiber Jumpers
An FC fiber jumper uses a round connector, as shown in Figure 10-34.
Figure 10-34 FC fiber jumper
Protective cap
FC connector

To insert an FC fiber jumper, align it with the optical interface, push it in, and tighten the external
screw socket by spinning the screw socket clockwise.
To remove it, loosen the screw socket, and pull the fiber jumper out.
LC Fiber Jumpers
An LC fiber jumper uses a square plug-in connector, as shown in Figure 10-35.
10-35
Figure 10-35 LC fiber jumper
Protective cap
LC connector

To insert an LC fiber jumper, align it with the optical interface and push it in with appropriate
force.
To remove it, push down the clamping and hold the clamping, push the fiber jumper forward a
little, and then pull out the fiber jumper.
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
11 Board Information Quicklook
About This Chapter
This topic provides the functions, power consumption, weight, substitution information, and
loopback capability of each board.
11.1 Functions of Each Board
This topic provides the functions of each board that the OptiX 155/622H uses.
11.2 Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the boards that the OptiX
155/622H uses.
11.3 Board Substitution
Certain boards of the OptiX 155/622H can be substituted for one another although they are of
different types.
11.4 Loopback Capability of the Boards
The SDH boards, PDH boards, and data boards of the OptiX 155/622H support various types
of loopbacks.
Hardware Description 11 Board Information Quicklook
11-1
11.1 Functions of Each Board
This topic provides the functions of each board that the OptiX 155/622H uses.
SDH Boards
Table 11-1Table 11-2 lists the functions of the SDH boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses.
Table 11-1 Functions of the SDH boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses
Board Full Name Function
OI16D 2xSTM-16 optical interface board Receives and transmits 2xSTM-16
optical signals. The optical interfaces
are integrated with the SCB.
OI4 1xSTM-4 optical interface board Receives and transmits 1xSTM-4
optical signals, which are accessed
from the front panel.
optical signals. The optical signals are
accessed from the front panel of the
OI4D, or the optical interfaces are
OI2S 1xSTM-1 optical interface board Receives and transmits 1xSTM-1
SL1Q 4xSTM-1 optical interface board Receives and transmits 4xSTM-1
SL1O 8xSTM-1 optical interface board Receives and transmits 8xSTM-1
SB2L 1xSTM-1 single-fiber bidirectional
Receives and transmits 1xSTM-1
SB2R 1xSTM-1 single-fiber bidirectional
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
SB2D 2xSTM-1 single-fiber bidirectional
SLE 1xSTM-1 electrical interface board Receives and transmits 1xSTM-1
electrical signals, which are accessed
SDE 2xSTM-1 electrical interface board Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1

Table 11-2 Functions of the SDH boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses
optical signals. The optical interfaces
are integrated with the SCB.
OI4 1xSTM-4 optical interface board Receives and transmits 1xSTM-4
OI2S 1xSTM-1 optical interface board Receives and transmits 1xSTM-1
SL1Q 4xSTM-1 optical interface board Receives and transmits 4xSTM-1
SL1O 8xSTM-1 optical interface board Receives and transmits 8xSTM-1
SLE 1xSTM-1 electrical interface board Receives and transmits 1xSTM-1
11-3
SDE 2xSTM-1 electrical interface board Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1

PDH Boards
Table 11-3Table 11-4 lists the functions of the PDH boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses.
Table 11-3 Functions of the PDH boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses
SP1S 4xE1 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
4xE1 electrical signals,
which are accessed from the
front panel.
SP1D 8xE1 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.
16xE1 electrical signals.
The electrical signals are
accessed from the front
panel of the SP2D, or the
electrical interfaces are
PD2S 16xE1 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.
PD2D 32xE1 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.
PD2T 48xE1 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.
board
Receives and transmits
4xE1/T1 electrical signals,
front panel.
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
board
front panel.
board
front panel.
board
front panel.
board
front panel.
PE3S 1xE3 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.
PE3D 2xE3 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.
PE3T 3xE3 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.
PT3S 1xT3 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
1xT3 electrical signals,
front panel.
PT3D 2xT3 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.
PT3T 3xT3 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.

11-5
Table 11-4 Functions of the PDH boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses
front panel.
16xE1 electrical signals.
The electrical signals are
panel of the SP2D, or the
electrical interfaces are
PD2S 16xE1 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.
PD2D 32xE1 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.
PD2T 48xE1 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.
board
front panel.
board
front panel.
board
front panel.
board
front panel.
board
front panel.
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
PE3S 1xE3 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.
PE3D 2xE3 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.
PE3T 3xE3 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.
PT3S 1xT3 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.
PT3D 2xT3 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.
PT3T 3xT3 electrical interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.

Data Boards
Table 11-5Table 11-6 lists the functions of the data boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses.
Table 11-5 Functions of the data boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses
board
Accesses 8x10/100 Mbit/s
Ethernet services and
transparently transmits the
services in a point-to-point
manner.
interface board
Ethernet services, and
transmits the services in a
point-to-point manner or by
performing Layer 2
switching.
11-7
interface board
performing Layer 2
switching.
EF1 6-port Ethernet service interface
board
performing Layer 2
switching.
interface board
manner.
AIUD 2-port ATM interface board Receives and transmits
2xATM electrical signals,
front panel.
AIUQ 4-port ATM interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.
SHLQ Single-pair high-speed digital
subscriber line board
4xG.SHDSL signals, which
are accessed from the front
panel.
board
performing Layer 2
switching.
board
Accesses 4x100 Mbit/s
performing Layer 2
switching.
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
board
manner.
switching board
performing Layer 2
switching.
board
performing Layer 2
switching.
transmission board
manner.
N64 Nx64 kbit/s interface board Receives and transmits
2xNx64 kbit/s or 2xFramed
E1 signals, which are
panel.
N64Q 4xNx64 kbit/s interface board Receives and transmits
4xNx64 kbit/s signals, which
panel.
board
16xFramed E1 signals,
front panel.
TDA Multiple-channel audio and data
access board
Receives and transmits audio
and data signals, which are
panel.

11-9
Table 11-6 Functions of the data boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses
board
manner.
interface board
performing Layer 2
switching.
interface board
performing Layer 2
switching.
interface board
manner.
AIUD 2-port ATM interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.
AIUQ 4-port ATM interface board Receives and transmits
front panel.
board
performing Layer 2
switching.
board
performing Layer 2
switching.
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
board
manner.
switching board
performing Layer 2
switching.
board
performing Layer 2
switching.
transmission board
manner.
N64Q 4xNx64 kbit/s interface board Receives and transmits
4xNx64 kbit/s signals, which
panel.
board
16xFramed E1 signals,
front panel.

Packet Boards
Table 11-7 lists the functions of the packet boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses.
11-11
Table 11-7 Functions of the packet boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses
CXP Integrated mixed-service processing
board
l Accesses, processes, and
transfers the FE services
and GE services, and
performs convergence and
flow distribution for the
FE signals and GE signals.
l Receives, transmits, and
processes the synchronous
Ethernet packets and
IEEE 1588 V2 protocol
packets to realize the
precision time
synchronization function.
l Supports the Ethernet in-
band DCN.

11.2 Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the boards that the OptiX
155/622H uses.
Table 11-8Table 11-9 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the boards that
the OptiX 155/622H uses.
Table 11-8 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the boards that the OptiX 155/622H uses
Board Parameter Specified for the Optical Interface
Type of
Optical
Interface
Type of
Fiber
Maximu
m
Transmis
sion
Distance
(km)
Operating
Waveleng
th (nm)
Launched
Optical
Power
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Overload
(dBm)
OI16D S-16.1 Single-
mode LC
15 1310 -5 to 0 -21 0
OI4/OI4D Ie-4 Multi-
mode SC
0.5 1310 -20 to -14 -23 0
S-4.1 Single-
mode SC/
LC
15 1310 -15 to -8 -28 -8
L-4.1 Single-
mode SC/
LC
40 1310 -3 to +2 -30 -8
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Type of
Optical
Interface
Type of
Fiber
Maximu
m
Transmis
sion
Distance
(km)
Operating
Waveleng
th (nm)
Launched
Optical
Power
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Overload
(dBm)
L-4.2 Single-
mode SC/
LC
80 1550 -3 to +2 -28 -8
OI2S/
OI2D/
SL1Q/
SL1O
Ie-1 Multi-
mode SC
0.5 1310 -15 to -8 -23 -8
S-1.1 Single-
mode SC/
LC
15 1310 -15 to -8 -28 -8
L-1.1 Single-
mode SC/
LC
40 1310 -5 to 0 -34 -10
L-1.2 Single-
mode SC/
LC
80 1550 -5 to 0 -34 -10
SB2L/
SB2R/
SB2D
S-1.1 Single-
mode SC
15 1310/1550 -15 to -8 -28 -10
L-1.1 Single-
mode SC
60 1310/1550 -5 to 0 -34 -10
EF1 S-1.1 Single-
mode LC
15 1310 -15 to -8 -31 -7
Ie-1 Single-
mode LC
2 1310 -19.5 to -14 -29 -12
ELT2 S-1.1 Single-
mode LC
15 1310 -15 to -8 -31 -7
Ie-1 Single-
mode LC
2 1310 -19.5 to -14 -29 -12
EGS 1000BASE
-LX
Single-
mode LC
10 1310 -9 to -3 -20 -3
1000BASE
-SX
Multi-
mode LC
0.5 850 -9.5 to -2.5 -17 0
EGT 1000BASE
-LX
Single-
mode LC
15 1310 -9.5 to -3 -20 -3
1000BASE
-SX
Multi-
mode LC
0.5 850 -9.5 to -2.5 -17 0
11-13
Type of
Optical
Interface
Type of
Fiber
Maximu
m
Transmis
sion
Distance
(km)
Operating
Waveleng
th (nm)
Launched
Optical
Power
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Overload
(dBm)
CXP 100BASE-
FX
Single-
mode LC
15 1310 -15 to -8 -28 -7
1000BASE
-SX
Multi-
mode LC
0.5 850 -9.5 to -2.5 -17 0
1000BASE
-LX
Single-
mode LC
15 1310 -9.5 to -3 -20 -3
1000BASE
-VX
Single-
mode LC
40 1310 -4.5 to 0 -23 -3
1000BASE
-ZX
Single-
mode LC
80 1550 -2 to +5 -22 -3

Table 11-9 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the boards that the OptiX 155/622H
uses
Type of
Optical
Interfac
e
Type of
Fiber
Maxim
um
Transm
ission
Distanc
e (km)
Operati
ng
Wavele
ngth
(nm)
Launch
ed
Optical
Power
(dBm)
Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
(dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d (dBm)
OI16D S-16.1 Single-
mode LC
15 1310 -5 to 0 -21 0
OI4/
OI4D
Ie-4 Multi-
mode SC
0.5 1310 -20 to
-14
-23 0
S-4.1 Single-
mode
SC/LC
15 1310 -15 to -8 -28 -8
L-4.1 Single-
mode
SC/LC
40 1310 -3 to +2 -30 -8
L-4.2 Single-
mode
SC/LC
80 1550 -3 to +2 -28 -8
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Type of
Optical
Interfac
e
Type of
Fiber
Maxim
um
Transm
ission
Distanc
e (km)
Operati
ng
Wavele
ngth
(nm)
Launch
ed
Optical
Power
(dBm)
Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
(dBm)
Minim
um
Overloa
d (dBm)
OI2S/
OI2D/
SL1Q/
SL1O
Ie-1 Multi-
mode SC
0.5 1310 -15 to -8 -23 -8
S-1.1 Single-
mode
SC/LC
15 1310 -15 to -8 -28 -8
L-1.1 Single-
mode
SC/LC
40 1310 -5 to 0 -34 -10
L-1.2 Single-
mode
SC/LC
80 1550 -5 to 0 -34 -10
ELT2 S-1.1 Single-
mode LC
15 1310 -15 to -8 -31 -7
Ie-1 Single-
mode LC
2 1310 -19.5 to
-14
-29 -12
EGS 1000BA
SE-LX
Single-
mode LC
10 1310 -9 to -3 -20 -3
1000BA
SE-SX
Multi-
mode LC
0.5 850 -9.5 to
-2.5
-17 0
EGT 1000BA
SE-LX
Single-
mode LC
15 1310 -9.5 to -3 -20 -3
1000BA
SE-SX
Multi-
mode LC
0.5 850 -9.5 to
-2.5
-17 0

11.3 Board Substitution
Certain boards of the OptiX 155/622H can be substituted for one another although they are of
different types.
Table 11-10 lists the boards that can be substituted by other boards.
11-15
Table 11-10 Boards that can be substituted by other boards
Board Remarks
SS42OI4 and SS44OI4 The two types of boards with the same optical module can
be substituted for each other.
SS42SP1D and
SS44SP1DA01
When the interface impedance of the SS42SP1D is set to 75
ohms by using the jumper, the SS42SP1D and the
SS44SP1DA01 can be substituted for each other.
SS42SP1D and
SS44SP1DB01
When the interface impedance of the SS42SP1D is set to 120
ohms by using the jumper, the SS42SP1D and the
SS44SP1DB01 can be substituted for each other.
SS42PD2S and SS44PD2S The two types of boards with the same impedance can be
substituted for each other.
SS42PD2D and SS44PD2D The two types of boards with the same impedance can be
SS42PD2T and SS44PD2T The two types of boards with the same impedance can be

NOTE
In the case of the optical interface boards that are of the same type but support different transmission
distances, the board with longer transmission distance can replace the board with shorter transmission
distance. Note that an optical attenuator may be required.
11.4 Loopback Capability of the Boards
The SDH boards, PDH boards, and data boards of the OptiX 155/622H support various types
of loopbacks.
Table 11-11Table 11-12 provides the loopback capability of the SDH boards of the OptiX
155/622H.
Table 11-11 Loopback capability of the SDH boards
Board Inloop at a
Port
Outloop at
a Port
Inloop on a
VC-4 Path
Outloop on
a VC-4 Path
Outloop on
a VC-3/
VC-12 Path
OI16D Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
OI4 Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
supported
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Board Inloop at a
Port
Outloop at
a Port
Inloop on a
VC-4 Path
Outloop on
a VC-4 Path
Outloop on
a VC-3/
VC-12 Path
OI2S Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
supported
SL1Q Supported Supported Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
SL1O Supported Supported Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
SB2D Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
SB2L Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
SB2R Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
SLE Supported Supported Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
SDE Supported Supported Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported

Table 11-12 Loopback capability of the SDH boards
Board Inloop at a
Port
Outloop at
a Port
Inloop on a
VC-4 Path
Outloop on
a VC-4 Path
Outloop on
a VC-3/
VC-12 Path
supported
OI4 Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
supported
OI2S Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
supported
SL1Q Supported Supported Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
11-17
Board Inloop at a
Port
Outloop at
a Port
Inloop on a
VC-4 Path
Outloop on
a VC-4 Path
Outloop on
a VC-3/
VC-12 Path
SL1O Supported Supported Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
SLE Supported Supported Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
SDE Supported Supported Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported

Table 11-13Table 11-14 provides the loopback capability of the PDH boards of the OptiX
155/622H.
Table 11-13 Loopback capability of the PDH boards
Board Inloop at a Port Outloop at a Port
SP1S Supported Supported
SP1D Supported Supported
PD2S Supported Supported
PD2D Supported Supported
PD2T Supported Supported
SM1S Supported Supported
SM1D Supported Supported
PM2S Supported Supported
PM2D Supported Supported
PM2T Supported Supported
PE3S Supported Supported
PE3D Supported Supported
PE3T Supported Supported
PT3S Supported Supported
PT3D Supported Supported
PT3T Supported Supported

Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 11-14 Loopback capability of the PDH boards
Board Inloop at a Port Outloop at a Port
PD2S Supported Supported
PD2D Supported Supported
PD2T Supported Supported
SM1S Supported Supported
SM1D Supported Supported
PM2S Supported Supported
PM2D Supported Supported
PM2T Supported Supported
PE3S Supported Supported
PE3D Supported Supported
PE3T Supported Supported
PT3S Supported Supported
PT3D Supported Supported
PT3T Supported Supported

Table 11-15Table 11-16 provides the loopback capability of the data boards of the OptiX
155/622H.
Table 11-15 Loopback capability of the data boards
Board Outloop
at the
MAC
Layer
Inloop at
the MAC
Layer
Outloop
at the
PHY
Layer
Inloop at
the PHY
Layer
Inloop and
Outloop on
a VC-4 Path
Inloop
and
Outlo
op on a
VC-3
Path
ET1 Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
support
ed
ET1O Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Supported Not
support
ed
11-19
Board Outloop
at the
MAC
Layer
Inloop at
the MAC
Layer
Outloop
at the
PHY
Layer
Inloop at
the PHY
Layer
Inloop and
Outloop on
a VC-4 Path
Inloop
and
Outlo
op on a
VC-3
Path
ET1D Not
supported
Supported Not
supported
Supported Supported Not
support
ed
EF1 Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
support
ed
EFS Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
Support
ed
EFS4 Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
Support
ed
EFSC Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
Support
ed
EGS Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
Support
ed
EFT Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
Support
ed
ELT2 Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
Support
ed
EGT Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
Support
ed

Table 11-16 Loopback capability of the data boards
Board Outloop
at the
MAC
Layer
Inloop at
the MAC
Layer
Outloop
at the
PHY
Layer
Inloop at
the PHY
Layer
Inloop and
Outloop on
a VC-4 Path
Inloop
and
Outlo
op on a
VC-3
Path
ET1 Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
support
ed
ET1O Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Supported Not
support
ed
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Board Outloop
at the
MAC
Layer
Inloop at
the MAC
Layer
Outloop
at the
PHY
Layer
Inloop at
the PHY
Layer
Inloop and
Outloop on
a VC-4 Path
Inloop
and
Outlo
op on a
VC-3
Path
ET1D Not
supported
Supported Not
supported
Supported Supported Not
support
ed
EFS Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
Support
ed
EFS4 Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
Support
ed
EFSC Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
Support
ed
EGS Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
Support
ed
EFT Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
Support
ed
ELT2 Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
Support
ed
EGT Supported Supported Supported Supported Not
supported
Support
ed

Table 11-17 provides the loopback capability of the ATM boards of the OptiX 155/622H.
Table 11-17 Loopback capability of the ATM boards
Board Outloop at an
External Port
Inloop at an
External Port
Outloop at an
Internal Port
Inloop at an
Internal Port
AIUD Supported Supported Supported Supported
AIUQ Supported Supported Supported Supported

Table 11-18 provides the loopback capability of the packet boards of the OptiX 155/622H.
11-21
Table 11-18 Loopback capability of the packet boards
Board Outloop
at the
MAC
Layer
Inloop at
the MAC
Layer
Outloop
at the
PHY
Layer
Inloop at
the PHY
Layer
Inloop
and
Outloop
on a VC-4
Path
Inloop
and
Outloop
on a VC-3
Path
CXP Supported Not
supported
Not
supported
Supported Not
supported
Not
supported

Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
12 Indicators
About This Chapter
This appendix provides the meanings of the statuses of the following indicators: indicators on
the front panel of the chassis, indicators on the SCB, indicators on the optical interface boards,
and indicators on the Ethernet service interface boards.
12.1 Indicators on the Front Panel of the OptiX 155/622H Chassis
The description of the indicators on the front panel of the OptiX 155/622H chassis includes the
names of the indicators, statuses of the indicators, and meanings of the statuses.
12.2 Indicators of the SCB
The description of the indicators on the SCB includes the names of the indicators, statuses of
the indicators, and meanings of the statuses.
12.3 Indicators of the CXP
The description of the indicators on the CXP includes the names of the indicators, statuses of
12.4 Indicators on the Optical Interface Boards
The description of the indicators on the optical interface boards includes the names of the
indicators, statuses of the indicators, and meanings of the statuses.
12.5 Indicators on the Ethernet Service Interface Boards
The description of the indicators on the Ethernet service interface boards includes the names of
the indicators, statuses of the indicators, and meanings of the statuses.
Hardware Description 12 Indicators
12-1
12.1 Indicators on the Front Panel of the OptiX 155/622H
Chassis
The description of the indicators on the front panel of the OptiX 155/622H chassis includes the
names of the indicators, statuses of the indicators, and meanings of the statuses.
Table 12-1 provides the meanings of the statuses of the indicators on the front panel of the OptiX
155/622H chassis.
Table 12-1 Indicators on the front panel of the OptiX 155/622H chassis
ETN: Ethernet
indicator (yellow)
Off The Ethernet cable is not connected.
On, not flashing The Ethernet cable is connected but no data is
being transmitted.
Flashing The Ethernet cable is connected and data is being
transmitted.
RUN: running
indicator (green)
Flashing once every
other second
Flashing once every
four seconds
Database protection mode: The communication
between the board and the SCC unit is
interrupted.
Flashing five times
every second
Program starting/loading: The board is not in
service.
Flashing twice
every second
Flashing once every
second
RALM: critical
alarm indicator
(red)
On A critical alarm occurs.
Off No critical alarm occurs.
YALM: major
alarm indicator
(yellow)
On A major alarm or a minor alarm occurs.
Off No major alarm or minor alarm occurs.
FANALM: fan
alarm indicator
(yellow)
On At least one fan works abnormally.
Off All the fans work normally.

12 Indicators
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
12.2 Indicators of the SCB
The description of the indicators on the SCB includes the names of the indicators, statuses of
Table 12-2 provides the meanings of the statuses of the indicators on the SCB.
Table 12-2 Indicators on the front panel of the SCB
RUN: green running
indicator
Flashing once every
other second
Flashing once every
four seconds
Database protection mode: The
communication between the board
and the SCC unit is interrupted.
Flashing five times
every second
Program starting/loading: The board
is not in service.
Flashing twice
every second
Flashing once every
second
3s repeatedly
The board operates normally in
coordinated mode.
2s repeatedly
CRT: critical alarm
indicator
Constantly off No critical alarm occurs on the
equipment.
Constantly on A critical alarm occurs on the
equipment.
2s repeatedly
ETHERNET: data
transceiving indicator of
the NM interface
(orange)
Constantly on or
flashing
receiving data.
receiving data.
ETHERNET: connection
status indicator of the
NM interface (green)
Constantly on The network cable is correctly
Constantly off The network cable fails to connect to
the interface.
Orange indicator for the
On The transparent data or external time
12-3
data/housekeeping
interfaces
Off No transparent data or external time
Green indicator for the
data/housekeeping
interfaces
On Housekeeping alarms are input/
output.
Off No housekeeping alarms are input/
output.
LOS: signal indicator on
the optical interface (red)
Constantly on The optical interface does not receive
optical signals.
every second
high.
Flashing once every
second
low.
Flashing once every
three seconds
The optical interface receives the
MS_RDI alarm.
Constantly off The optical interface normally
receives optical signals.

12.3 Indicators of the CXP
The description of the indicators on the CXP includes the names of the indicators, statuses of
Table 12-3 provides the meanings of the statuses of the indicators on the CXP.
Table 12-3 Indicators of the CXP
STATE: hardware status
indicator
On (green) The board operates normally.
On (red) The board is faulty.
Off The board is not powered on
or not configured with
services.
LM: alarm indicator Off No alarm occurs on the
board.
Flashing thrice every two
seconds
board.
Flashing twice every two
seconds
A major alarm occurs on the
board.
12 Indicators
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Flashing once every two
seconds
A minor alarm occurs on the
board.
On The board self-check fails.
RUN: green running
indicator
second
Flashing once every four
seconds
Database protection mode:
The communication between
the board and the SCC unit is
interrupted.
second
Program starting/loading:
The board is not in service.
Flashing twice every second The board software is being
erased.
Flashing once every second The board software is not
loaded.
repeatedly
The board operates normally
in coordinated mode.
repeatedly
The board enters the
extended BIOS state in
coordinated mode.
ACT: data transceiving
indicator of the Ethernet
interface
On or flashing The network interface is
data.
Off The network interface is not
data.
LINK/OMP: Ethernet
connection status and optical
power indicator
On (green) The connection between the
fiber and the interface is
successful. In addition, the
transmit optical power and
receive optical power of the
optical module are normal.
Flashing red thrice every
very high.
Flashing red once every
very low.
Flashing yellow thrice every
is very high.
12-5
Flashing yellow once every
is very low.
Off Any of the following states,
including but not limited to,
may occur:
l The optical power is
normal.
l The optical module is not
installed.
l The installed optical
module is incorrect.
l The E2ROM information
about the optical module
cannot be read normally.
l The fiber connection is
disconnected or the
interface is disabled.

12.4 Indicators on the Optical Interface Boards
The description of the indicators on the optical interface boards includes the names of the
indicators, statuses of the indicators, and meanings of the statuses.
Table 12-4 provides the meanings of the statuses of the indicators on the optical interface boards.
Table 12-4 Indicators on the optical interface boards
Fiber connection indicator
(red)
On The optical interface does not receive
any optical signal.
Off The optical interface receives normal
optical signals.

12.5 Indicators on the Ethernet Service Interface Boards
The description of the indicators on the Ethernet service interface boards includes the names of
the indicators, statuses of the indicators, and meanings of the statuses.
Table 12-5 provides the meanings of the statuses of the indicators on the Ethernet service
interface boards.
12 Indicators
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Table 12-5 Indicators on the Ethernet service interface boards
ALM:Red alarm indicator Off No alarm occurs on the
board.
every other second
A critical alarm occurs
on the board.
Flashing twice
every other second
A major alarm occurs
on the board.
Flashing once every
other second
A minor alarm occurs
on the board.
Constantly on The board self-check
fails.
RUN:Greenrunning indicator Flashing five times
every second
Flashing once every
second
The board operates
normally.
LINK: connection status indicator of the
Ethernet interface (green)
On The network cable or
fiber is correctly
connected to the
interface.
Off The network cable or
fiber fails to connect to
the interface.
ACT: data transceiving indicator of the
Ethernet interface (orange)
Constantly on or
flashing
The interface is
transmitting or
receiving data.
Constantly off The interface is not
transmitting or
receiving data.

12-7
13 Parameter Settings
About This Chapter
You can set the parameters for the SDH boards, PDH boards, and data boards by using the T2000.
13.1 SDH Boards
The parameters that need to be set for the SDH boards include the J0 byte, J1 byte, and C2 byte.
13.2 PDH Boards
The parameters that need to be set for the PDH boards include the J1 byte, C2 byte, J2 byte, V5
byte, equipping indication, and tributary loopback.
13.3 Data Boards
The parameters that need to be set for the data boards include the SDH parameters, Ethernet
parameters, and ATM parameters.
Hardware Description 13 Parameter Settings
13-1
13.1 SDH Boards
The parameters that need to be set for the SDH boards include the J0 byte, J1 byte, and C2 byte.
J0 Byte
The J0 byte is used to transmit repetitively a section access point identifier so that a section
receiver can verify its continued connection to the intended transmitter. If the J0 byte to be
received and the J0 byte to be transmitted are not set to the same value, a J0_MM alarm is
generated.
Generally, the J0 byte uses the default value. Set the default value of the J0 byte to be transmitted
to " HuaWei SBS " and the default value of the J0 byte to be received to "disabled".
NOTE
In the character string " HuaWei SBS ", there is one blank space before "HuaWei" and five blank spaces
after "SBS".
J1 Byte
J1 is the path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a path access point identifier
so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the intended transmitter.
When a J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path generates an
HP_TIM alarm.
C2 Byte
C2 is the signal label byte, which is used to indicate the multiplexing structure of the VC frames
and the payload property. The C2 byte to be sent must match the C2 byte to be received. When
a C2 mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path at the local end generates an HP_SLM
alarm.
Table 13-1 shows the relation between the service type and the value of the C2 byte.
Table 13-1 Relation between the service type and the value of the C2 byte
Service Type Value of the C2 Byte (Hexadecimal)
TUG structure 02
34M/45M into C-3 04
140M into C-4 12
Unequipped 00

Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
13.2 PDH Boards
The parameters that need to be set for the PDH boards include the J1 byte, C2 byte, J2 byte, V5
byte, equipping indication, and tributary loopback.
J1 Byte
When a J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path generates an
HP_TIM alarm.
C2 Byte
a C2 mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path at the local end generates an HP_SLM
alarm.
Table 13-2 shows the relation between the service type and the value of the C2 byte.
Generally, the C2 byte uses the default value. The default value of the C2 byte is "TUG structure".
In the case of the interconnected equipment, the C2 byte must be set to the same value.
Table 13-2 Relation between the service type and the value of the C2 byte
Service Type Value of the C2 Byte (Hexadecimal)
TUG structure 02
34M/45M into C-3 04
140M into C-4 12
Unequipped 00

J2 Byte
J2 is the VC-12 path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a low order path access
point identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the
intended transmitter.
V5 Byte
V5 is the path status and signal label byte. This byte is used to detect bit errors and indicate
remote errors or remote failures on lower order paths. The LP_REI and LP_RFI alarms are
13-3
generated accordingly. Table 13-3 shows the relation between the service type and the value of
the V5 byte.
Generally, the V5 byte uses the default value. The default value of the V5 byte is "asynchronous".
In the case of the interconnected equipment, the V5 byte must be set to the same value.
Table 13-3 Relation between the service type and the value of the V5 byte
Service Type Value of the V5 Byte (Hexadecimal)
Asynchronous 02
Byte synchronization 04
HDLC/PPP mapping 0A
Unequipped or supervisory-unequipped 00

Service Load Indication
l When a service channel does not process the carried service, select "Unequipped" or
"Supervisory-unequipped".
l When a service channel processes the carried service, select "Equipped-Non-Specific
Payload".
Tributary Loopback
The tributary loopback function is used to locate faults in the service channels.
The tributary loopback is also a diagnosis function. When the tributary loopback is performed,
related services are interrupted.
Path Service Type
This parameter is set to specify the service type for the channel.
l Select E1 or T1 for E1/T1 processing boards according to the actual service type in the
channel.
l Select E3 or T3 for E3/T3 processing boards according to the actual service type in the
channel.
Serial Port Protocol Mode
In the case of the DDN boards, select the protocol mode of the Nx64 kbit/s signals. The protocol
mode includes V.35, V.24, X.21, RS-449, RS-530 and RS-530A.
13.3 Data Boards
The parameters that need to be set for the data boards include the SDH parameters, Ethernet
parameters, and ATM parameters.
13.3.1 SDH Parameters
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
The SDH parameters that need to be set for the data boards include the J1 byte, C2 byte, J2 byte,
and V5 byte.
13.3.2 Ethernet Parameters
The Ethernet parameters that need to be set for the data boards include the working mode and
LCAS.
13.3.3 ATM Parameters
The ATM parameters that need to be set for the ATM boards include the port type and traffic
type.
13.3.1 SDH Parameters
The SDH parameters that need to be set for the data boards include the J1 byte, C2 byte, J2 byte,
and V5 byte.
J1 Byte
When a J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the VC-3 path generates an LP_TIM_VC3
alarm and the VC-4 path generates an HP_TIM alarm.
C2 Byte
a C2 mismatch is detected, the VC-3 path generates an LP_SLM_VC3 alarm and the VC-4 path
generates an HP_SLM alarm.
J2 Byte
J2 is the VC-12 path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a low order path access
point identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the
intended transmitter. When a J2 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the VC-12 path
generates an LP_TIM_VC12 alarm.
V5 Byte
V5 is the path status and signal label byte. This byte is used to detect bit errors and indicate
remote errors or remote failures on lower order paths. The LP_REI and LP_RFI alarms are
generated accordingly. When a V5 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the VC-12 path
generates an LP_SLM_VC12 alarm.
Generally, the V5 byte uses the default value. The default value of the V5 byte is "asynchronous".
In the case of the interconnected equipment, the V5 byte must be set to the same value.
13-5
13.3.2 Ethernet Parameters
The Ethernet parameters that need to be set for the data boards include the working mode and
LCAS.
Working Mode
Generally, the Ethernet ports of the interconnected equipment are required to work in the same
fixed working mode. If the working modes on two sides do not match, packets may be lost or
the bit rate may decrease. Services may be completely interrupted in the case of large volume
of traffic.
LCAS
This parameter specifies whether to enable the LCAS function.
Maximum Frame Length
This parameter needs to be set in the case of external interfaces. By default, the maximum frame
length is 1522 bytes.
Mapping Protocol
This parameter needs to be set to consistent values in the case of the interconnected equipment.
TAG
This parameter is used to identify the type of packets. This parameter can be set to "Tag aware",
"Access", or "Hybrid".
l When this parameter is set to "Tag aware", the interface transparently transmits the packets
that contain a TAG and discards the packets that do not contain a TAG.
l When this parameter is set to "Access", the interface adds a TAG to the packets that do not
contain a TAG according to the default VLAN ID of the interface, and discards the packets
that contain a TAG.
l When this parameter is set to "Hybrid", the interface processes both the packets that contain
a TAG and the packets that do not contain a TAG. The interface adds a TAG to the packets
that do not contain a TAG according to the default VLAN ID of the interface.
VLAN ID
This parameter is used to set the default VLAN ID of the interface.
Port Type
In the case of the boards that support the MPLS function, the ports are available in two types,
namely, provider (P) and provider edge (PE). The port of type P indicates a core network port
of a service provider. The port of type PE indicates an edge port of a service provider. You need
to set this parameter when you configure EVPL services or EVPLAN services. In the case of an
external port, set this parameter to "PE". In the case of an internal port, set this parameter to "P".
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Encapsulation Format
This parameter can be set to "MartinioE" or "Stack VLAN". When the port type parameter is
set to "P", this parameter becomes valid. In the case of EVPL services, set this parameter to
"MartinioE". In the case of EVPLAN services, set this parameter to "Stack VLAN".
Port Attributes
In the case of the board that supports the QinQ function, you can set this parameter. This
parameter can be set to "UNI", "NNI", "N-UNI", "S-aware", or "C-aware".
13.3.3 ATM Parameters
The ATM parameters that need to be set for the ATM boards include the port type and traffic
type.
Port Type
The port types include NNI and UNI. The default port type is UNI.
Traffic Type
The traffic type must meet the requirements of the port.
Service Type
Four service types are available, namely, CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR.
Peak Cell Rate
Set the peak cell rate of the ATM services. This parameter must be set for each service type.
Sustainable Cell Rate
Set the sustainable cell rate of the ATM services. In the case of the rt-VBR and nrt-VBR services,
set this parameter.
MBS
Set the MBS of the ATM services. In the case of the rt-VBR and nrt-VBR services, set this
parameter.
CDVT
Set the CDVT of the ATM services. In the case of the CBR, rt-VBR, and UBR services, set this
parameter.
13-7
14 Power Consumption and Weight of Each
Board
This appendix provides the power consumption and weight of each board.
Table 14-1 provides the power consumption and weight of each board of the OptiX 155/622H.
Table 14-1 Power consumption and weight of each board
Board Power Consumption
(W)
Weight (kg)
OI16D - -
OI4 9 0.2
OI4D 11 0.2
OI2S 10 0.21
OI2D 10 0.22
SL1O 14 0.66
SL1Q 9 0.6
SB2D 11 0.2
SB2L 7 0.2
SB2R 7 0.2
SLE 9 0.21
SDE 10 0.22
SP1S 3.95 0.21
SP1D 5 0.24
SP2D 5 0.25
PD2S 11 0.54
Hardware Description 14 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board
14-1
(W)
Weight (kg)
PD2D 14.5 0.66
PD2T 18.5 0.77
SM1S 4 0.2
SM1D 4.5 0.22
PM2S 9 0.52
PM2D 10 0.64
PM2T 11 0.74
PE3S 7 0.28
PE3D 7 0.28
PE3T 7 0.28
PT3S 7 0.28
PT3D 7 0.28
PT3T 7 0.28
ET1 26.1 0.74
ET1O 26.1 0.74
ET1D 16 0.26
EF1 25 0.68
EFT 8 0.26
ELT2 9 0.22
EGT 11 0.2
EFS 23 0.26
EFS4 10 0.3
EFSC 22 0.6
EGS 25 0.3
AIUD 23 0.66
AIUQ 25 0.68
N64 4 0.22
N64Q 5 0.20
FP2D 8.4 0.25
14 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
(W)
Weight (kg)
SHLQ 10 0.24
TDA 12 0.7
SS49SCB 21 0.8
SS46SCB 25 0.8
EMU 2.3 0.25
FAN 8.3 0.3
POI/POU 3.5 0.15
CXP 55 1.22
Hardware Description 14 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board
14-3
A Glossary
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.
A.1 Numerics
A.2 A
A.3 B
A.4 C
A.5 D
A.6 E
A.7 F
A.8 G
A.9 H
A.10 I
A.11 J
A.12 L
A.13 M
A.14 N
A.15 O
A.16 P
A.17 Q
A.18 R
A.19 S
A.20 T
A.21 U
A.22 V
Hardware Description A Glossary
A-1
A.23 W
A Glossary
A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
A.1 Numerics
1+1 protection An architecture that has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection
SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. At the source end, the normal traffic signal is
permanently bridged to both the working and protection SNC/trail. At the sink end, the
normal traffic signal is selected from the better of the two SNCs/trails. Due to the
permanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected traffic
signal to be provided.
100BASE-T IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network.
100BASE-TX IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area network
over two pairs of Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair
(STP) wire.
10BASE-T Defined in IEEE 802.3, it is an Ethernet specification that uses the twist pair with the
maximum length of 100 meters at 10 Mbit/s for each network segment.
1:N protection A 1:N protection architecture has N normal service signals, N working SNCs/trails and
one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra service signal.
1PPS Pulse per second, which, strictly speaking, is not a time synchronization signal. This is
because 1PPS provides only the "gauge" corresponding to the UTC second, but does not
provide the information about the day, month, or year. Therefore, 1PPS is used as the
reference for frequency synchronization. On certain occasions, 1PPS can also be used
on other interfaces for high precision timing.
3R Reshaping, Retiming, Regenerating.
A.2 A
ACAP The Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization (ACAP) operation provides orthogonal
polarizations between two adjacent communication channels.
Active/standby
switching of cross-
connect board
If there are two cross-connect boards on the SDH equipment, which are in hot back-up
relation of each other, the operation reliability is improved. When both the cross-connect
boards are in position, the one inserted first is in the working status. Unplug the active
board, the standby one will run in the working status automatically. When the active
cross-connect board fails in self-test, the board is pulled out, the board power supply
fails or the board hardware operation fails, the standby cross-connect board can
automatically take the place of the active one.
add/drop multiplexer A network element that adds/drops the PDH signal or STM-x (x < N) signal to/from the
STM-N signal on the SDH transport network.
ADM See add/drop multiplexer
ADM See optical add/drop multiplexing
Administrative Unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer
and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order
VC) and a AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to
the multiplex section frame start.
A-3
Administrative Unit
Group
One or more Administrative Units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM payload
are termed an Administrative Unit Group (AUG).An AUG-1 consists of a homogeneous
assembly of AU-3s or an AU-4.
Administrator A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCore
product. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities.
aging time N/A
Alarm A means of alerting the operator that specified abnormal condition exists.
Alarm automatic
report
When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the N2000. Then,
an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the details of the alarm.
alarm cable The cable for generation of visual or audio alarms.
alarm filtering The alarms are reported to the N2000 BMS, which decides whether to display and save
the alarms according to the filtering states of the alarms. The filtered alarms are not
displayed and saved on the N2000 BMS, but still monitored.
alarm indication On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the current
status of the NE. When the green indicator is on, it indicates that the NE is powered on.
When the red indicator is on, it indicates that a critical alarm is generated. When the
orange indicator is on, it indicates that a major alarm is generated. When the yellow
indicator is on, it indicates that a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator on
the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board. (Metro)
Alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure
has been detected. It is associated with multiple transport layers.
Alarm inversion For the port that has already been configured but has no service, this function can be
used to avoid generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference.
The alarm report condition of the NE port is related to the alarm inverse mode (not
inverse, automatic recovery and manual recovery) setting of the NE and the alarm
inversion status (Enable and Disable) setting of the port. When the alarm inversion mode
of NE is set to no inversion, alarms of the port will be reported as usual no matter whatever
the inversion status of the port is. When the alarm inversion mode of the NE is set to
automatic recovery, and the alarm inversion state of the port is set to Enabled, then the
alarm of the port will be suppressed. The alarm inversion status of the port will
automatically recover to "not inverse" after the alarm ends. For the port that has already
been configured but not actually loaded with services, this function can be used to avoid
generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference. When the
alarm inverse mode of the NE is set as "not automatic recovery", if the alarm inversion
status of the port is set as Enable, the alarm of the port will be reported.
Alarm Masking Alarms are detected and reported to the N2000 UMS, and whether the alarm information
is displayed and stored is decided by the function of alarm masking. These alarms masked
are not displayed and stored on the N2000 UMS.
Alarm Severity Alarm severity is used to identify the impact of a fault on services. According to ITU-T
recommendations, the alarm is classified into four severities: Critical, Major, Minor,
Warning.
Alarm suppression When alarms of various levels occur at the same time, certain lower-level alarms are
suppressed by higher-level alarms, and thus will not be reported.
ALS See Automatic laser shutdown
APS See Automatic Protection Switching
A Glossary
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
asynchronous Pertaining to, being, or characteristic of something that is not dependent on timing.
Asynchronous
Transfer Mode
A data transfer technology based on cell, in which packets allocation relies on channel
demand. It supports fast packet switching to achieve efficient utilization of network
resources. The size of a cell is 53 bytes, which consist of 48-byte payload and 5-byte
header.
ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATPC See Automatic Transmit Power Control
attenuation Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels.
AU See Administrative Unit
AUG See Administrative Unit Group
auto-negotiation A mechanism that enables devices to negotiate the SPEED and MODE (duplex or half-
duplex) of an Ethernet Link.
Automatic laser
shutdown
A function that enables the shutdown of the laser when the optical interface board does
not carry services or the fiber is faulty. The automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function
shortens the working time of the laser and thus extends the service life of the laser. In
addition, the ALS prevents human injury caused by the laser beam.
Automatic Protection
Switching
Automatic Protection Switching (APS) is the capability of a transmission system to
detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the
traffic.
Automatic Transmit
Power Control
A method of automatically adjusting the transmit power at the opposite end based on the
transmit signal detected at the receiver.
A.3 B
backplane A backplane is an electronic circuit board containing circuitry and sockets into which
additional electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged; in a
computer, generally synonymous with or part of the motherboard.
backup A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes of
database recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to data
synchronization between active and standby boards.
bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a
network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the
transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.
BER See Bit Error Rate
Binding strap A component installed on two sides of the cabinet for binding various cables.
binding strap The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent
polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).
A-5
BIP BIP-X code is defined as a method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code
is generated by the transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such
a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit
sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over
the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is
generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored
partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit
position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered
portion includes the BIP-X.
bit error An error that occurs in some bits in the digital code stream after being received, judged,
and regenerated, thus damaging the quality of the transmitted information
Bit Error Rate Bit error rate. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used
to measure the communications quality of a network.
BITS See Building Integrated Timing Supply
bound path Binding several seriel paths into a parallel path, thus improving the data throughput
capacity.
bridge A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them. Bridges
operate at the physical network level. Bridges differs from repeaters because bridges
store and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical signals.
Bridges differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while routers use IP
addresses.
broadcast The process of sending packets from a source to multiple destinations. All the ports of
the nodes in the network can receive packets.
Broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is
determined by the broadcast address.
Build-in WDM A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into products that belong to the
OSN series . That is, the OSN products can add or drop several wavelengths directly.
Building Integrated
Timing Supply
A building timing supply that minimizes the number of synchronization links entering
an office. Sometimes referred to as a synchronization supply unit.
A.4 C
cabling The method by which a group of insulated conductors is mechanically assembled or
twisted together.
cabling aperture A hole which is used for cable routing in the cabinet.
Cabling frame The frame which is used for cable routing over the cabinet.
cabling trough The trough which is used for cable routing in the cabinet.
captive nut Captive nuts (or as they are more correctly named, 'tee nuts') have a range of uses but
are more commonly used in the hobby for engine fixing (securing engine mounts to the
firewall), wing fixings, and undercarriage fixing.
CAR See committed access rate
CBR See Constant Bit Rate
CDVT See Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
A Glossary
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Cell Delay Variation
Tolerance
This parameter measures the tolerance level a network interface has to aggressive
sending (back-to-back or very closely spaced cells) by a connected device, and does not
apply to end-systems.
Centralized alarm
system
The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console.
Chain network One type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be in series.
channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two
or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio
(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three.The amount of information transmitted
per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per
second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s),
and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).
Circuit The circuit of the service port on the access device.
class of service Class of service (CoS) is a technology or method used to classify services into different
categories according to the service quality.
Class of Service Class of Service is abbreviated to CoS. CoS is a rule for queuing. It classifies the packets
according to the service type field or the tag in packets, and specifies different priorities
for them. All the nodes in DiffServ domain forwards the packets according to their
priorities.
client A device that sends requests, receives responses, and obtains services from the server.
Clock Synchronization Also called frequency synchronization, clock synchronization means that the signal
frequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point need not be consistent.
Clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a
network.
CM See Configuration Management
committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.
CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified
into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate
can be defined.
Concatenation A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be
used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.
Configuration Data A command file for an NE which defines the configuration of the NE hardware. With
the file, the NE can coordinate with other NEs in the entire network. Configuration data
is the key factor for the normal running of the entire network.
Configuration
Management
In a network, a system for gathering current configuration information from all nodes in
a LAN.
Configure To set the basic parameters of an operation object.
congestion An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network service
efficiency.
Connection point A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound
to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the
input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is
characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point
is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair.
A-7
Constant Bit Rate constant bit rate. A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers
cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend
on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
convergence It refers to the speed and capability for a group of networking devices to run a specific
routing protocol. It functions to keep the network topology consistent.
Convergence A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one or
several channels of required signals.
Convergence service A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in order to provide for
the specific requirements of the convergence service user.
Conversion In the context of message handling, a transmittal event in which an MTA transforms
parts of a message content from one encoded information type to another, or alters a
probe so it appears that the described messages were so modified.
corrugated tube N/A
CoS See class of service
CoS See Class of Service
CRC See Cyclic Redundancy Check
current alarm An alarm in unrecovered and unacknowledged state, unrecovered and acknowledged
state, or recovered and unacknowledged state. Treatment measures must be taken on
these alarms.
Current Performance
Data
Performance data stored in the current register. An NE provides two types registers for
each performance parameter of the performance monitoring entity. The registers are 15-
minute register and 24-hour register, which are used to accumulate the performance data
within the current monitoring period.
Cyclic Redundancy
Check
A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses
a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it
sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after
transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission
was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission
includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values. Communications
protocols such as XMODEM and Kermit use cyclical redundancy checking.
A.5 D
DDF See Digital Distribution Frame
Defect A limited interruption in the ability of an item to perform a required function.
demultiplexing To separate from a common input into several outputs. Demultiplexing occurs at many
levels. Hardware demultiplexes signals from a transmission line based on time or carrier
frequency to allow multiple, simultaneous transmissions across a single physical cable.
A Glossary
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Device set It is an aggregate of multiple managed equipments. Device set facilitates the authority
management on devices in the management domain of the U2000. If some operation
authorities over one device set are assigned to a user (user group), these operation
authorities over all devices of the device set are assigned to the user (user group), thus
eliminating the need to set the operation authorities over these devices respectively. It is
suggested to design device set according to such criteria as geographical region, network
level, device type, etc.
differentiated services
code point
Values for a 6-bit field defined for the IPv4 and IPv6 packet headers that enhance class
of service (CoS) distinctions in routers.
Differentiated Services
Code Point
Differentiated Services CodePoint. A marker in the header of each IP packet using bits
0-6 in the DS field. Routers provide differentiated classes of services to various service
streams/flows based on this marker. In other words, routers select corresponding PHB
according to the DSCP value.
Digital Distribution
Frame
Digital Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer cables.
digital signal A signal in which information is represented by a limited number of discrete statesfor
example, high and low voltagesrather than by fluctuating levels in a continuous stream,
as in an analog signal. In the pulse code modulation (PCM) technology, the 8 kHz
sampling frequency is used and a byte contains 8 bits in length. Therefore, a digital signal
is also referred to as a byte-based code stream. Digital signals, with simple structures
and broad bandwidth, are easy to shape or regenerate, and are not easily affected by
external interference.
Distributed Link
Aggregation Group
The distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) is a board-level port protection
technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end.
In the case of a link down failure on a port or a hardware failure on a board, the services
can automatically be switched to the slave board, thus realizing 1+1 protection for the
inter-board ports.
DLAG See Distributed Link Aggregation Group
DNI See Dual Node Interconnection
domain A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.
DSCP See differentiated services code point
DSCP See Differentiated Services Code Point
Dual Node
Interconnection
DNI provides an alternative physical interconnection point, between the rings, in case
of an interconnection failure scenario.
A.6 E
E-LAN A L2VPN service type that is provided for the user Ethernet in different domains over
the PSN network. For the user Ethernet, the entire PSN network serves as a Layer 2
switch.
E-Line Ethernet line. An point-to-point private service type that is provided for the user Ethernet
in different domains.
Ear bracket A component on the side of the subrack. It is used to install the subrack into a cabinet.
ECC See Embedded Control Channel
A-9
ElectroStatic Discharge A sudden flow of electric current through a material that is normally an insulator.
Embedded Control
Channel
An ECC provides a logical operations channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data
communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer.
encapsulation The technique used by layered protocols to add header information and possibly tail
information to the protocol data unit.
Enterprise System
Connection
A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system.
It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.
Entity A part, device, subsystem, functional unit, equipment or system that can be individually
considered. For ETH-OAM, an OAM entity generally refers to a specified system or
subsystem that supports the OAM protocol. For example, a Huawei Ethernet service
processing board is an OAM entity.
EPL See Ethernet Private Line
ESCON See Enterprise System Connection
ESD See ElectroStatic Discharge
ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or
cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.
Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision
Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/
s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..
Ethernet Alarm Group The Ethernet alarm group periodically obtain the statistics value to compare with the
configured threshold. If the value exceeds the threshold, an event is reported.
Ethernet Private LAN Both a LAN service and a private service. Transport bandwidth is never shared between
different customers.
Ethernet Private Line A point-to-point interconnection between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing.
Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers.
ethernet virtual private
line service
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared
bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
EVPL See ethernet virtual private line service
Exercise Switching An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The
protection switching is not really performed.
Exerciser - Ring This command exercises ring protection switching of the requested channel without
completing the actual bridge and switch. The command is issued and the responses are
checked, but no working traffic is affected.
Extended ID The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different network
segments in a WAN. The extended ID and ID form the physical ID of the NE.
extra traffic The traffic that is carried over the protection channels when that capacity is not used for
the protection of working traffic. Extra traffic is not protected.
A Glossary
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
A.7 F
Failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function
to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been
detected.
Fairness For any link specified in a ring network, if the data packets transmitted by the source
node are constrained by the fairness algorithm, the source node is provided with certain
bandwidth capacities. This feature of RPR is called fairness.
fairness algorithm An algorithm designed to ensure the fair sharing of bandwidth among stations in the case
of congestion or overloading.
fault An accidental condition that causes a functinal unit to fail to perform its required
function.
FD See frequency diversity
FDDI See fiber distributed data interface
feature code Code(s) used to select/activate a service feature (e.g. forwarding, using two or three digit
codes preceded by * or 11 or #, and which may precede subsequent digit selection).
FEC See forwarding equivalence class
FEC See Forward Error Correction
fiber A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for
connections between subracks or inside a subrack.
Fiber Connect. A new generation connection protocol which connects the host with various control units.
It carries single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber channel, and
provides higher rate and better performance than ESCON.
Fiber Connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple
the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A
connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source
(or a detector).
fiber distributed data
interface
A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-
speed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications for
transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based on
the token ring network.
fiber/cable Fiber & Cable is the general name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physical
entities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects (user
information and network management information) and perform transmission function
in the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cable
transmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiber
connection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEs
represents the connection relation between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of optical
fiber type.
FICON See Fiber Connect.
A-11
Flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the T2000 or NE
software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets that
have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present, two flows are supported:
port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port ID and port+VLAN flow is
based on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexist in the same port.
Forced switch This function forces the service to switch from the working channel to the protection
channel, with the service not to be restored automatically. This switch occurs regardless
of the state of the protection channels or boards, unless the protection channels or boards
are satisfying a higher priority bridge request.
Forward Error
Correction
A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at
the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission are corrected at the receive end.
forwarding equivalence
class
A term used in Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) to describe a set of packets with
similar or identical characteristics which may be forwarded the same way; that is, they
may be bound to the same MPLS label.
frame A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length
is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.
A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,
a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-
specified by the sending and receiving parties.
Free-run mode An operating condition of a clock, the output signal of which is strongly influenced by
the oscillating element and not controlled by servo phase-locking techniques. In this
mode the clock has never had a network reference input, or the clock has lost external
reference and has no access to stored data, that could be acquired from a previously
connected external reference. Free-run begins when the clock output no longer reflects
the influence of a connected external reference, or transition from it. Free-run terminates
when the clock output has achieved lock to an external reference.
frequency diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain
frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then
performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.
Full duplex The system that can transmit information in both directions on a communication link.On
the communication link, both parties can send and receive data at the same time.
A.8 G
Gain The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical
amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber,
which expressed in dB.
Gateway IP When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be used
to enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is the
gateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannot
identify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IP
networks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of the
network and one IP address of the Ethernet port.
A Glossary
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Gateway Network
Element
Gateway NE refers to the NE that communicates with the NMS via Ethernet or serial
port line. The non-gateway NE communicates with the gateway NE via ECC and
communicates with the NMS via the gateway NE. The gateway NE is a communication
route that the U2000 must pass through when managing the entire network. The
communication status between the gateway NE and the U2000 can be:(1) Normal: The
current communication is efficient; (2) Connecting: The destination gateway responds,
and the communication is interrupted but is being connected; (3) Disconnected: The
destination gateway does not respond (Maybe the network cable is disconnected or not
within the same network segment), and the communication is unreachable or the gateway
is disabled manually.
GFP GFP is a framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has
been standardized by ITU-T SG15.
GNE See Gateway Network Element
A.9 H
half-duplex An operation mode of the Ethernet port. In half-duplex mode, a port can only send or
receive data at a time.
handle A component of the panel. It is used to insert or remove boards and RTMs in and out of
slots.
Hardware loopback A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface
to the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback.
History alarm The confirmed alarms that have been saved in the memory and other external memories.
History Performance
Data
The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is autoreported and
stored in the NMS.
A.10 I
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol
IGMP Snooping IGMP proxy means that in some network topologies, the device does not set up the
multicast routes, but to learn the information about the accessed multicast group members
and forward it to the upstream multicast router. The upstream multicast router sets up
the multicast routes.
IMA frame The IMA frame is used as the unit of control in the IMA protocol. It is a logical frame
defined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N links
in an IMA group.
Input jitter tolerance The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which, when
modulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two errored
seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30
second measurement intervals.
Intelligent power
adjusting
The factors such as fiber cut, degradation of equipment, and removal of connectors may
result in the loss of the optical power signals. The function of intelligent power adjusting
(IPA) enables the ROP laser and booster amplifier (BA) of a section to be shut down
automatically. In this way, the maintainers, their eyes in particular, can be protected for
the exposed optical fibers when they are performing the repairs.
A-13
Interface board area The area for the interface boards on the subrack.
Internal cable The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces and
optical interfaces within the cabinet.
Internet Group
Management Protocol
The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among
the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish
and maintain multicast group memberships.
IP address In the TCP/IP protocol, it is used to uniquely identify the 32-bit address of the
communication port, An IP address consists of a network ID and a unique host ID. An
IP address consists of the decimal values of its eight bytes, separated with periods; for
example,192.168.7.27.
IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote
NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead
DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication.
IPA See Intelligent power adjusting
A.11 J
Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system
instability.
jitter tolerance Jitter tolerance is defined as the peak-to-peak amplitude of sinusoidal jitter applied on
the input ATM-PON signal that causes a 1 dB optical power penalty at the optical
equipment.
A.12 L
label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
Label A short identifier that is of fixed length and local significance. A label is used to uniquely
identify the FEC to which a packet belongs. A label does not contain topology
information. It is carried in the header of a packet and does not contain topology
information.
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG See link aggregation group
Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser
light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor
laser as the light source.
Layer A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically
as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer
of its characteristic information.
layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits
and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the
second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
LB See Loopback
LCAS See Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
A Glossary
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
LCT See Local craft terminal
License A permission that the vendor provides for the user with a specific function, capacity, and
durability of a product. A license can be a file or a serial number. Usually the license
consists of encrypted codes, and the operation authority varies with different level of
license.
Link In the topology view, a link is used to identify the physical or logical connection between
two topological nodes.
Link Aggregation
Control Protocol
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is part of an IEEE specification (802.3ad)
that allows you to bundle several physical ports to form a single logical channel. LACP
allows a switch to negotiate an automatic bundle by sending LACP packets to the peer.
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
Link Capacity
Adjustment Scheme
The Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) is designed to allow the dynamic
provisioning of bandwidth, using VCAT, to meet customer requirements.
Local craft terminal A single layer network management scheme that manages a transmission network
consisting of a maximum of five NEs. In this way, the comprehensive management of
the multi-service transmission network is achieved. Normally, the cross-over network
cables and serial port cables are used to connect the local craft terminal (LCT) to an NE.
Then, the LCT can configure and maintain a single NE.
Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being
switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been
switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to
the working channel.
Loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors.
Lower Threshold When the performance event count value is smaller than a certain value, a threshold-
crossing event occurs. The value is the lower threshold.
A.13 M
MA See Maintenance Association
Maintenance
Association
That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the
connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance
Entities.
Maintenance Domain The network or the part of the network for which faults in connectivity are to be managed,
belonging to a single administration. The boundary of a Maintenance Domain is defined
by a set DSAPs, each of which may become a point of connectivity to a Service Instance.
MAN See Metropolitan Area Network
Manual switching A protection switching. When the protection path is normal and there is no request of a
higher level switching, the service is manually switched from the working path to the
protection path, to test whether the network still has the protection capability.
Mapping A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual containers at the boundary of
an SDH network.
A-15
Marking-off template A quadrate cardboard with four holes. It is used to mark the positions of the installation
holes for the cabinet.
MD See Maintenance Domain
Mean launched power The average power of a pseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fibre by the
transmitter.
Metropolitan Area
Network
A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computer
resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large local
area network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN).
The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger
network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is
also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them
with backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network.
MPLS See Multi-Protocol Label Switch
MSOH See Multiplex Section Overhead
MSP See multiplex section protection
MSTP See Multi-service transmission platform
MSTP See Multiple spanning tree protocol
Multi-Protocol Label
Switch
A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link
layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of
IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of
networks, and is beneficial to routing.
Multi-service
transmission platform
It is based on the SDH platform, capable of accessing, processing and transmitting TDM
services, ATM services, and Ethernet services, and providing unified management of
these services.
Multicast A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The
destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast
group rather than a host.
Multiple spanning tree
protocol
The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks
redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case,
the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The
protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This
solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/
RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiplex Section
Overhead
The overhead that comprises rows 5 to 9 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. See SOH
definition.
multiplex section
protection
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
Multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher
order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex
section.
A Glossary
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
A.14 N
N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection
channel.
NE See network element
NE Explorer The main operation interface, of the U2000, which is used to manage the OptiX
equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can congure, manage and maintain the NE,
boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.
network element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One
NE is at least equipped with one system control board which manages and monitors the
entire network element. The NE software runs on the system control board.
network node interface The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node.
network segment Network Segment means any discrete part of the Network.
NNI See network node interface
A.15 O
OA See Optical Amplifier
OAM auto-discovery In the case of OAM auto-discovery, two interconnected ports, enabled with the Ethernet
in the First Mile OAM (EFM OAM) function, negotiate to determine whether the mutual
EFM OAM configuration match with each other by sending and responding to the OAM
protocol data unit (OAMPDU). If the mutual EFM OAM configuration match, the two
ports enter the EFM OAM handshake phase. In the handshake phase, the two ports
regularly send the OAMPDU to maintain the neighborhood relation.
OCP See Optical Channel Protection
ODF See Optical Distribution Frame
Online Help The capability of many programs and operating systems to display advice or instructions
for using their features when so requested by the user.
optical add/drop
multiplexing
A process that adds the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop
the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
Optical Amplifier Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of the
stimulated emission taking place in a suitable active medium.
Optical attenuator A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that the
optical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It is
available in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator.
Optical Channel
Protection
In an optical transmission link that contains multiple wavelengths, when a certain
wavelength goes faulty, the services at the wavelength can be protected if the optical
channel protection is configured.
Optical Connector A component normally attached to an optical cable or piece of apparatus for the purpose
of providing frequent optical interconnection/disconnection of optical fibers or cables.
A-17
Optical Distribution
Frame
A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
Optical Interface A component that connects several transmit or receive units.
Optical Time Domain
Reflectometer
A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication system
and measures the time history of the pulse reflection.
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.
OTDR See Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
OTU Optical Transponder Unit. A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals
into the G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength.
Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
Overhead Extra bits in a digital stream used to carry information besides traffic signals. Orderwire,
for example, would be considered overhead information.
A.16 P
Paired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the
backplane. When the SCC unit is faulty or offline, the overheads can be passed through
between the paired slots by using the directly connected overhead bus. When two SDH
boards form an MSP ring, the boards need to be inserted in paired slots so that the K
bytes can be passed through.
pass through When services are passed through, it indicates that transmission equipment does not
process the service received and only detects the signal quality.
Path A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end
of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is
a certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in the
network management system, a user can test the performance of a network path between
a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet
loss ratio or other aspects.
path protection Path protection is a special case of fixed partitioning sub-path protection technique where
every primary path is partitioned into only one sub-path (i.e., h = D, diameter of the
network).
PDH See Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PE Provider Edge. A PE is the name of the device or set of devices at the edge of the provider
network with the functionality that is needed to interface with the customer.
Performance register Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15-
min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min history
performance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSES
register. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so
every board functional module has a performance register. A performance register is
used to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so
as to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics.
A Glossary
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
performance threshold The performance threshold is a limit for generating an alarm for a selected entity. When
the measurement data satisfies the preset alarm threshold or exceeds the preset grads,
the PM subsystem generates a performance alarm.
Performance threshold Performance events usually have upper and lower thresholds. When the performance
event count value exceeds the upper threshold, a performance threshold-crossing event
is generated; when the performance event count value is below the upper threshold for
a period of time, the performance threshold-crossing event is ended. In this way,
performance jitter caused by some sudden events can be shielded. A few performance
events only have one threshold, which is the special case that upper threshold and lower
threshold are equal.
Permanent Virtual
Connection
Traditional ATM Permanent Virtual Connection that is established/released upon a
request initiated by a management request procedure (that is all nodes supporting the
connections need to be instructed by the network management).
plesiochronous Qualifying two time-varying phenomena, time-scales, or signals in which corresponding
significant instants occur at the same rate, any variations in rate being constrained within
specified limits. Note: Corresponding significant instants are separated by time intervals
having durations which may vary without limit.
Plesiochronous Digital
Hierarchy
The Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) is a technology used in
telecommunications networks to transport large quantities of data over digital transport
equipment such as fibre optic and microwave radio systems.
Pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to
the frame reference of the transport entity on which it is supported.
Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies
power for the subracks in the cabinet.
PRBS See Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence
Primitive In the hierarchy of signaling system No.7, when the upper layer applies for services from
the lower layer or the lower layer transmits services to the upper layer, the data is
exchanged between the user and the service provider. In this case, the data transmitted
between adjacent layers is called primitive.
Private Line The line, such as the subscriber cable and trunk cable, which are hired by the
telecommunication carrier and are used to meet the special requirement of the user. The
line is also called hired line. Generally, the switch device is not contained.
protection grounding A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, the
cable is yellow and green.
Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
Protection service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labelled protection.
Protection subnet In the NMS, the protection subnet becomes a concept of network level other than
multiplex section rings or path protection rings. The protection sub-network involves
NEs and fibre cable connections.
Protection View The user interface, of the network management system, which is used to manage
protection in the network.
Pseudo-Random
Binary Sequence
A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the
values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
PVC See Permanent Virtual Connection
A-19
PW Pseudo wire. A mechanism that bears the simulated services between PEs on the PSN
(Packet Switched Network).
A.17 Q
QoS See Quality of Service
Quality of Service Quality of Service, which determines the satisfaction of a subscriber for a service. QoS
is influenced by the following factors applicable to all services: service operability,
service accessibility, service maintainability, and service integrity.
A.18 R
Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree
convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received
power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-10 BER.
Reference clock A reference clock is usually of high stability , accuracy and autonomy and it's frequency
can be compared with other clock as a benchmark.
REG A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
Regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes,
waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
Regenerator section
overhead
The regenerator section overhead comprises rows 1 to 3 of the SOH of the STM-N signal.
Remote optical
pumping amplifier
(ROPA)
An remote optical amplifier sub-system designed for applications where power supply
and monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power compensation
solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission.
Resilient Packet Ring A network topology being developed as a new standard for fiber optic rings.
ring network A ring network is a network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other
nodes, forming a circular pathway for signals.
route A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/
IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.
router Links a local network to a remote network. For example, your company's network
probably uses a router to connect to the Internet. Can be used to connect a LAN to a
LAN, a WAN to a WAN, or a LAN to the Internet.
RPR See Resilient Packet Ring
RS232 In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It can
communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the
transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s.
RS422 The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital
interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and others
are the same as RS232.
A Glossary
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
A.19 S
S1 byte In an SDH network, each network element traces step by step to the same clock reference
source through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the synchronization
of the whole network. If a clock reference source traced by the NE is lost, the clock of
this NE will trace another clock reference source of lower level. To implement protection
switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about the clock quality
information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to
transmit the network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of
the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality
grades. The specific coding information is shown in the following table. Auto protection
switching of clocks in the synchronous network can be implemented by using S1 byte
and following the certain switching protocol.
SD See space diversity
SD See Signal Degrade
SDH See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
Section The portion of a SONET transmission facility, including terminating points, between (i)
a terminal network element and a regenerator or (ii) two regenerators. A terminating
point is the point after signal regeneration at which performance monitoring is (or may
be) done.
Self-healing Self-healing is the establishment of a replacement connection by network without the
NMC function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is found
by the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at that
time.
Serial port extended
ECC
The ECC channel realized by means of serial port.
server A network device that provides services to network users by managing shared resources,
often used in the context of a client-server architecture for a LAN.
Service protection A measure that ensures that the services can be received at the receive end.
settings Parameters of a system or operation that can be selected by the user.
SF See Signal Fail
SF See SF
SF Signal Fail. A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-
end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
SFP See Small Form-Factor Pluggable
Side Mode Suppression
Ratio
The Side Mode Suppression Ratio (SMSR) is the ratio of the largest peak of the total
source spectrum to the second largest peak.
signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal
cable.
Signal Degrade SD is a signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded
defect (e.g., dDEG) condition is active.
A-21
Signal Fail SF is a signal indicating the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (not being the degraded defect) is active.
Simple Network
Management Protocol
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
slide rail Angle-bars on which shelves and chassis may slide and be supported within a cabinet or
shelf.
Small Form-Factor
Pluggable
A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
SMSR See Side Mode Suppression Ratio
SNCMP See Subnetwork connection multipath protection
SNCP See SubNetwork Connection Protection
SNCP node Set the SNC node on the protection sub-network to support sub-network connection
protection that spans protection sub-networks. The SNCP node of the ring sub-network
can support electric circuit dually feed and selectively receive a timeslot out of the ring,
thus implementing sub-network connection protection. The SNCP node is generally set
on the node on the line board with the path protection type of the dual fed and selectively
received.
SNCTP See Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol
space diversity A protection mode. The main and standby radios are set up in Hot Standby mode, but
are connected to their own antennas. Both antennas, separated by a specific distance, are
receiving the signal transmitted from the online radio at the other end of the lin
Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol. STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop.
STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through
certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message
Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be
transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to
active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices
to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM.
STP See Spanning Tree Protocol
Sub-network number It is used to differentiate the different network sections in the sub-network conference.
Actually it is the first several digits (one or two) of the user phone number. An orderwire
phone number is composed of the sub-network number and the user number.
subnet A logical entity in the transmission network, which comprises a group of network
management objects. A subnet can contain NEs and other subnets.
subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are
destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,
server or router and is matched with the IP address.
A Glossary
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
Subnetwork connection
multipath protection
The only difference is that SNCP is of 1+1 protection and SNCMP is of N+1 protection.
That is, several backup channels protect one active channel in SNCMP.
SubNetwork
Connection Protection
A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if
the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required
level.
Subnetwork
Connection Tunnel
Protection
SNCTP provides a VC-4 level channel protection. When the working channel is faulty,
the services of the entire VC-4 path can be switched over to the protection channel.
Support A part used to support and fix a cabinet on the antistatic floor
Suppression state An attribute set to determine whether an NE monitors the alarm. Under suppression
status, NE will not monitor the corresponding alarm conditions and the alarm will not
occur even when the alarm conditions are met.
Switching priority There may be the case that several protected boards need to be switched; thus the tributary
board switching priority should be set. If the switching priority of each board is set the
same, the tributary board that fails later cannot be switched. The board with higher
priority can preempt the switching of that with lower priority.
Switching restoration
time
It refers to the period of time between the start of detecting and the moment when the
line is switched back to the original status after protection switching occurs in the MSP
sub-network.
Synchronization Status
Message
A message that is used to transmit the quality levels of timing signals on the synchronous
timing link. Through this message, the node clocks of the SDH network and the
synchronization network can aquire upper stream clock information, and the two perform
operations on the corresponding clocks, such as tracing, switchover, or converting hold),
and then forward the synchronization information of this node to down stream.
Synchronous Digital
Hierarchy
SDH is a transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines
the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed
counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is
suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since
it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
Synchronous source A clock providing timing services to connected network elements. This would include
clocks conforming to Recommendations G.811, G.812 and G.813.
A.20 T
T2000 The T2000 is a subnet management system (SNMS). In the telecommunication
management network architecture, the T2000 is located between the NE level and
network level, which can support all NE level functions and part of the network level
management functions. See also NM.
T2000 LCT A lite version of T2000. It is an element level management system for the optical
transmission network. It can manage SDH, DWDM and Metro optical transmission
equipment. See also LCT.
Tandem Connection
Monitor
In the SDH transport hierarchy, the TCM is located between the AU/TU management
layer and HP/LP layer. It uses the N1/N2 byte of POH overhead to monitor the quality
of the transport channels on a transmission section (TCM section).
A-23
TCM See Tandem Connection Monitor
TCP/IP See Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
tie wrap N/A
Time Slot Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are able
to interconnect.
Time Synchronization Also called the moment synchronization, time synchronization means that the
synchronization of the absolute time, which requires that the starting time of the signals
keeps consistent with the UTC time.
ToS See Type of Service
TPS See Tributary Protection Switch
Trail management
function
A network level management function of the network management system. Through trail
management, you can configure end-to-end services, view graphic interface and visual
routes of a trail, query detailed information of a trail, filter, search and locate a trail
quickly, manage and maintain trails in a centralized manner, manage alarms and
performance data by trail, and print a trail report.
Transceiver A transmitter and receiver housed together in a single unit and having some circuits in
common, often for portable or mobile use.
Transmission Control
Protocol/Internet
Protocol
Common name for the suite of protocols developed to support the construction of
worldwide internetworks.
transparent
transmission
A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content but
encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase.
Tray A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices.
Tributary loopback A fault can be located for each service path by performing loopback to each path of the
tributary board. There are three kinds of loopback modes. 1. No loopback: It is the normal
status. No loopback is needed when the equipment runs efficiently; 2. Outloop: When
arriving at the line board after passing the input port in the local NE, the input signal is
directly looped back to the service output end; 3. Inloop: The input signal is returned
along the original trail from the tributary board of the target NE.
Tributary Protection
Switch
Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to
protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.
Tributary unit An information structure which provides adaptation between the lower order path layer
and the higher order path layer. It consists of an information payload (the lower order
VC) and a TU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to
the higher order VC frame start.
Tributary Unit Group One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VC-
n payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way that
mixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructed
to increase flexibility of the transport network
TUG See Tributary Unit Group
Type of Service A field in an IP packet (IP datagram) that is used for quality of service (QoS). The TOS
field is 8 bits, broken into five sub-fields.
A Glossary
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
A.21 U
underfloor cabling The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.
UNI See User Network Interface
Unprotected Pertaining to the transmission of the services that are not protected, the services cannot
be switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service is
interrupted, because protection mechanism is not configured.
Unprotected sub-
network
It refers to a sub-network without any protection mechanism. The purpose of such
configuration is to provide the basic data of trail protection for the subsequent trail
management.
Upload An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the T2000. The
configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the T2000 side.
Upper threshold The critical value that can induce unexpected events if exceeded.
Upward cabling Cables or fibers connect the rack with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.
User A client user of the NMS. The user name and password uniquely identifies the operation
rights of a user in the NMS.
User Network Interface The interface between a network and the user of network services.
A.22 V
VC See Virtual concatenation
Virtual concatenation N/A
Virtual Container A Virtual Container is the information structure used to support path layer connections
in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information
fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 s.
Virtual local area
network
A subset of the active topology of a Bridged Local Area Network. Associated with each
VLAN is a VLAN Identifier (VID).
Virtual Private
Network
The extension of a private network that encompasses encapsulated, encrypted, and
authenticated links across shared or public networks. VPN connections can provide
remote access and routed connections to private networks over the Internet.
VLAN See Virtual local area network
VPN See Virtual Private Network
A.23 W
Wait to Restore Time A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault recovered - trail/connection can
be used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic
signal from.
Wait-to-Restore A period of time that must elapse from a recovered fault before an LSP/span can be used
again to transport the normal traffic and/or to select the normal traffic from.
A-25
Wander The long-term variations of the significant instants of a digital signal from their ideal
position in time (where long-term implies that these variations are of frequency less than
10Hz).
washer A washer is a thin flat ring of metal or rubber which is placed over a bolt before the nut
is screwed on.
Wavelength Division
Multiplexing
Wavelength Division Multiplexing. WDM technology utilizes the characteristics of
broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fibre, uses multiple
wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in a
single fibre.
Wavelength protection
group
The wavelength protection group is important to describe the wavelength protection
structure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet in the SDH NE. The
wavelength path protection can only work with the correct configuration of the
wavelength protection group.
WDM See Wavelength Division Multiplexing
Winding pipe A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.
Working path The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic.
WTR See Wait-to-Restore
WTR See Wait to Restore Time
A Glossary
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
B Acronyms and Abbreviations
A
ABR Available Bit Rate
AC Alternating Current
ADM Add/drop Multiplexer
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
APID Access Point Identifier
APS Automatic Protection Switching
APSC Automatic Protection Switching Control
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control
AU Adaptation Unit
AUG Administrative Unit Group

B
BA Booster Amplifier
BBE Background Block Error
BER Bit Error Rate
BDI Backward Defect Indicator
BGND Backhaul Ground
BIP Bit-Interleaved Parity
BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply
BMC Best Master Clock
Hardware Description B Acronyms and Abbreviations
B-1
BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit
BPS Board Protection Switching
BSC Base Station Controller
BSS Base Station Subsystem
BWS Backbone WDM System

C
CAR Committed Access Rate
CAS Channel Associated Signaling
CBPDU Configuration BPDU
CBR Constant Bit Rate
CBS Committed Burst Size
CC Connectivity Check
CCDP Co-Channel Dual Polarization
CCM Continuity Check Message
CDR Clock and Data Recovery
CDVT Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
CFM Connectivity Fault Management
CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol
CIR Committed Information Rate
CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree
CLP Cell Loss Priority
CM Configuration Management
CoS Class of Service
CPE Customer Premises Equipment
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CSF Client Signal Fail
CST Common Spanning Tree
CTS Cordless Telephony System
C-VLAN Customer VLAN

B-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
D
DC Direct Current
DCC Data Communication Channel
DCD Data Carrier Detect
DCE Data Circuit-terminal Equipment
DCN Data Communication Network
DDF Digital Distribution Frame
DDN Digital Data Network
DiffServ Differentiated Service
DLAG Distributed Link Aggregation Group
DNI Dual Node Interconnection
DQDB Distributed Queue Dual Bus
DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point
DSL Digital Subscriber Line
DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer
DSR Data Set Ready
DTE Data Terminal Equipments
DTR Data Terminal Ready
DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcast- Asynchronous Serial Interface
DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

E
ECC Embedded Control Channel
EFM Ethernet in the First Mile
EMS Element Management System
EoS Ethernet Over SDH
EPL Ethernet Private Line
EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN
ESCON Enterprise Systems Connection
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ESN Equipment Serial Number
B-3
ES-IS End System-Intermedia System
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line
EVPLAN Ethernet Virtual Private LAN
E-AGGR Ethernet-Aggregation
E-Line Ethernet Line
E-LAN Ethernet LAN

F
FC Fiber Channel
FCS Frame Check Sequence
FD Frequency Diversity
FDDI Fiber Distributed Data Interface
FDI Forward Defect Indicator
FE Fast Ethernet
FEC Forwarding Equivalence Class
FEC Forward Error Correction
FICON Fiber Connection
FIFO First In First Out
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
FS Forced Switching
FTP File Transfer Protocol

G
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFC Generic Flow Control
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
GND Ground
GNE Gateway Network Element
GPS Global Positioning System
GSM Global System for Mobile Communications
GTS Generic Traffic Shaping
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
GUI Graphic User Interface

H
HDLC High level Data Link Control
HEC Header Error Control
HP Higher Order Path
HPA Higher Order Path Adaptation
HPOH Higher Order Path Overhead
HPT Higher Order Path Termination
HSB Hot Standby
HSM Hitless Switch Mode

I
IC Integrated Circuit
ICP IMA Control Protocol
ID Identity
IDU Indoor Unit
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IF Intermediate Frequency
IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol
IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM
IP Internet Protocol
IPA Intelligent Power Adjusting
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
ISO International Standard Organization
ISP Internet Service Provider
IST Internal Spanning Tree
IS-IS Intermedia System-Intermedia System
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union -
Telecommunication Standardization Sector

L
B-5
LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG Link Aggregation Group
LAN Local Area Network
LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH
LB Loopback
LBM Loopback Message
LBR Loopback Return
LC Lucent Connector
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LLC Logical Link Control
LOC Loss of Continuity
LOF Loss of frame
LOM Loss Of Multiframe
LOS Loss Of Signal
LP Lower Order Path
LPA Linear Power Amplifier
LPT Link State Pass Through
LSP Label Switched Path
LSR Label Switching Router
LT Link Trace
LTM Link Trace Message

M
MA Maintenance Association
MAC Medium Access Control
MADM Multiple Add/drop Multiplexer
MAN Metropolitan Area Network
MBS Max Burst Size
MCF Message Communication Function
MCR Minimum Cell Rate
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
MD Maintenance Domain
MEP Maintenance End Point
MIB Management Information Base
MIP Maintenance Intermediate Point
MODEM MOdulator-DEModulator
MP Maintenance Point
MPID Maintenance Point Identification
MPLS Multi-Protocol Label Switch
MS Multiplex Section
MSA Multiplex Section Adaptation
MSOH Multiplex Section Overhead
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MST Multiplex Section Termination
MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance
MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MSTP Multiservice Transport Platform
MTIE Maximum Time Interval Error
MTU Maximum Transmission Unit

N
NE Network Element
NLP Normal Link Pulse
NM Network Manager
NMS Network Management System
NNI Network Node Interface
NPC Network Parameter Control
nrt-VBR non-real time Variable Bit Rate
NRZ Non Return to Zero code
NSAP Network Service Access Point
NTP Network Time Protocol

O
B-7
OA Optical Amplifier
OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
OAM Operations, Administration and Maintenance
OAMPDU OAM Protocol Data Unit
OCP Optical Channel Protection
OCS Optical Core Switching
ODF Optical Distribution Frame
ODU Outdoor Unit
OFS Out-of-frame Second
OHA Overhead Access Function
OLT Optical Line Terminal
ONU Optical Network Unit
OOF Out of Frame
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSN Optical Switch Node
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
OTDR Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer

P
PA Power Amplifier
PBS Peak Burst Size
PC Personal Computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PCR Peak Cell Rate
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PE Provider Edge
PGND Protection Ground
PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode
PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode
PIR Peak Information Rate
POH Path Overhead
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
POS Packet Over SDH
PLL Phase-Locked Loop
PPI PDH Physical Interface
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PPS Port Protection Switching
PRBS Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence
PRC Primary Reference Clock
PS Packet Switched
PSD Power Spectral Density
PTI Payload Type Indicator
PTP Precision Time Protocol
PW Pseudo Wire
PVC Permanent Virtual Connection

Q
QinQ 802.1Q in 802.1Q
QoS Quality of Service

R
RDI Remote Defect Indication
RF Radio Frequency
RFA Request For Announcement
RFI Request for Information
RMON Remote Network Monitoring
RNC Radio Network Controller
RP Rendezvous Point
RPR Resilient Packet Ring
RSL Received Signal Level
RSOH Regenerator Section Overhead
RST Regenerator Section Termination
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RTN Radio Transmission Node
B-9
rt-VBR real time Variable Bit Rate
RX Receiver/Reception

S
SAN Storage Area Network
SC Square Connector
SCB System Control Board
SCC System Control & Communication Unit
SCR Sustained Cell Rate
SD Signal Degrade
SD Space Diversity
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDP Serious Disturbance Period
SEC SDH Equipment Clock
SES Severely Errored Second
SETS Synchronous Equipment Timing Source
SF Signal Fail
SFP Small Form-Factor Pluggable
SHDSL Single Pair High-bit-rate Digital Subscriber Line
SLM Single Longitudinal Mode
SMSR Side Mode Suppression Ratio
SNC SubNetwork Connection
SNCMP Subnetwork Connection Multiple Protection
SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection
SNCTP Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR Signal-to-Noise Ratio
SOH Section Overhead
SPI SDH Physical Interface
SSM Synchronization Status Marker
SSMB Synchronization Status Message Byte
SSU Synchronization Supply Unit
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)
STM-1 SDH Transport Module -1
SSU Synchronization Supply Unit
STG Synchronous Timing Generator
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
SVC Switching Virtual Connection
S-VID Service VLAN ID
S-VLAN Service VLAN

T
TCN BPDU Topology Change Notification BPDU
TCI Tag Control Information
TCM Tandem Connection Monitor
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch
TM Terminal Multiplexer
TMN Telecommunications Management Network
ToS Type of Service
TPID TAG Protocol ID
TPS Tributary Protection Switch
TSD Trail Signal Degrade
TTL Time To Live
TU Tributary Unit
TUG Tributary Unit Group

U
UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
UAS Unavailable Second
UBR Unspecified Bit Rate
UNI User Network Interface
B-11
UPC Usage Parameter Control
UPI User Payload Identifier
UPM Uninterruptible Power Module
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
UTC Universal Time Coordinated

V
VB Virtual Bridge
VBR Variable Bit Rate
VC Virtual Connection
VCG Virtual Concatenation Group
VCI Virtual Channel Identifier
VLAN Virtual LAN
VP Virtual Path
VPI Virtual Path Identifier
VPN Virtual Private Network

W
WAN Wide Area Network
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing
WRED Weighted Random Early Detection
WTR Wait-to-Restore
Issue 01 (2010-03-25)

Metro1000 Hardware Description (V300R007C01 - 01)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Metro1000 Hardware Description (V300R007C01 - 01)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000) STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 MSTP

Optical Transmission System

You might also like